W8»/ 


UC-NRLF 


$B    MD    TSl 


O 
CO 

o 


M 


5 


/"/ 


J^'^ 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/dicksartofgymnasOOdickrich 


DIG  K'S 

AET  OF  GYMNASTICS 

CONTAINING 

PKACTICAL  AND  PKOGRESSIVE  EXERCISES  APPLICABLE  TO  ALL   THE 

PRINCIPAL  APPARATUS  OF  A  WELL-APPOINTED  GYMNASIUM 

PLAINLY    DESCRIBED 


PROFUSELY    IIjIjUSTRATED 


WILLIAM   B   DICK 


^•^S^"^'^*  or  Phyalcal  Education 

103  Gyauiiaslum  for  Mm 
^erkelajr  4.  Calif oiiu 
NEW    YORK 

DICK   &  FIT  Z  GERAL  D    PUBLISHERS 


COPYHIGHT,    1885,    BY 

SIOS   &    FITZGERALD. 


OONTEISTTS. 


Page. 
iNTrwODUCTION 5 

Technical  Teems 9 

Feee  Exercises 11 

TuMBLixa 16 

The  Leaping  Pole 20 

The  Vaulting  Hoese  23 

The  Hoeizontal  Bar 39 

Vaulting  Over  the  Bar Q\ 

The  Parallel  Bars 65 

The  Rings 83 

The  Row  of  Rings 95 

The  Trapeze 97 

The  Inclined  Ladder 108 


M674a55 


Die  K^S 

AET    OF    GYMNASTICS. 


UsTTRODUOTION. 


The  importance  of  physical  traming  for  the  development  of  muscle  and 
strengthening  the  human  frame  has  always  been  freely  admitted,  and  in 
modern  times  athletic  exercises  and  field  sports  form  a  necessary  adjunct  to 
a  thorough  or  collegiate  education. 

In  the  early  and  palmy  days  of  Ancient  Greece,  periodical  exhibitions  of 
Individual  prowess  in  feats  combining  strength,  agility  and  skill  were 
deemed  of  national  importance,  and  the  celebrated  Games  at  Olympia  and 
other  prominent  places  always  attracted  crowds  of  visitors,  and  were  highly 
appreciated  by  all  who  assisted  at  them.  In  all  these  games  the  contestants 
for  supremacy  and  fame  were  stripped  almost  nude,  and  hence  the  term 
**  Gymnast "  is  applied  to  the  votaries  of  Athletic  skill,  being  derived  from 
a  Greek  word  signifying  naked. 

Those  ancient  Games  included  Racing,  Wrestlmg,  and  various  field 
sports,  which  in  modem  times  are  classed  under  Athletics,  the  term 
"  Gymnastics  "  being  specially  given  to  the  exercises  performed  by  the  aid 
of  those  appliances  which  constitute  the  modern  Gymnasium. 

There  is  no  question  in  regard  to  the  advantages  which  accrue  from  a 
thorough  and  systematic  physical  training,  prominent  among  which  are  ease 
and  freedom  of  action,  endurance,  and  nerve.  Every  muscle  in  the  body 
has  its  object  and  use,  and  when  properly  developed  its  functions  are  per- 


6  INTRODUCTION. 

formed  promptly  and  effectually,  imparting  not  only  additional  physical 
power,  but  also  flexibility  and  grace.  The  perfect  control  which  is  thus 
gained  over  the  muscles  induces  rapidity  of  action  and  dexterity ;  the  eye 
acquires  precision,  and  with  the  rapidity  of  thought  the  well- trained  muscles 
act  responsive  to  the  will. 

All  these  advantages  evidently  tend  to  give  a  person  presence  of  mind 
In  danger,  and  confer  a  degree  of  courage,  based  upon  conscious  powers, 
that  cannot  be  attained  in  any  other  way ;  and  still  further,  gymnastic 
exercises  undoubtedly  induce  a  more  perfect  condition  of  physical  health, 
exuberance  of  spirits,  a  clear  braiU;  and  the  energy  inseparable  from  success 
in  all  enterprises. 

Among  the  Germans,  Gymnastics  form  a  prominent  part  of  education, 
commencing  with  the  simple  calisthenic  drill  in  the  Kindergarten,  and  fol- 
lowed by  the  regular  juvenile  classes  in  the  Turn-Hall,  in  which  both  sexes 
receive  almost  the  same  degree  of  training.  The  interest  in  these  exercises 
continues  as  the  young  folks  grow  up,  extending  in  many  instances  to  mature 
manhood,  and  the  numerous  Turnvereins,  in  which  emulation  and  sociali- 
bility  are  combined,  include  quite  a  fair  proportion  of  the  young  men  in 
every  German  community.  These  institutions,  together  with  the  numerous 
well-appointed  and  deservedly  popular  Gymnasiums  in  which  the  member- 
ship is  entirely  irrespective  of  nationaUty,  should  furnish  ample  means  for 
the  physical  education  of  all  who  desire  to  participate  in  its  benefits. 

Special  words  of  caution  and  advice,  where  they  are  most  needed,  will 
be  found  interspersed  throughout  this  work,  but  a  few  general  directions 
will  not  be  out  of  place  just  here. 

The  learner  at  first  should  studiously  avoid  over-taxing  his  strength ;  he 
should  adopt  only  such  exercises  as  are  entirely  within  his  powers,  and 
desist  the  moment  that  he  begins  to  experience  fatigue.  Power  of  endurance 
is  not  attained  by  violent  overstraining ;  on  the  contrary,  it  is  the  result  of 
moderation,  practice  and  perseverance. 

When  he  has  fairly  mastered  the  preliminary  Free  Exercises,  by  which 
he  will  learn  how  to  preserve  a  firm  balance  in  all  positions,  and  also  acquire 
some  degree  of  muscular  elasticity ;  then,  and  no  sooner,  he  may  commence 
to  exercise  regularly  on  the  various  apparatus  provided  for  the  purpose.  In 
every  instance  he  should  confine  himself  to  one  or  two  of  the  earlier 
exercises,  and  become  fairly  perfect  in  those  before  attempting  more  advanced 
and  difficult  feats.    He  will  find  that  the  order  in  which  the  exercises  in  each 


I  N  TRO  D  U  CTION. 


branch  are  arranged  in  this  work  is,  as  far  as  possible,  progressive,  and 
proficiency  in  each  in  its  regular  turn  will  result  in  proficiency  in  all. 

Before  attempting  any  exercise,  the  nature  of  every  movement  in  it  must 
be  studied  and  thoroughly  understood  by  precept  or  example,  and  in  some 
instances  preferably  by  both  combined ;  the  feat  should  then  be  attempted 
carefully,  deliberately,  and  without  fear.  Indecision  invites  failure ; 
resolution  gives  nerve,  and  insures  success. 

In  this  connection  the  illustrations  given  in  each  exercise  will  be  found  of 
indispensable  service,  making  plain  at  a  glance  movements  which  it  would 
be  hardly  possible  to  describe  without  their  aid,  and  in  most  cases  obviating 
the  necessity  of  the  practical  example  of  an  expert  instructor. 

In  order  to  secure  entire  freedom  of  action,  all  superfluous  clothing  should 
be  dispensed  with  when  exercising.  Gynmasts  usually  supply  themselves 
with  a  regular  costume  for  the  purpose,  consisting  of  a  shirt  and  drawers  of 
light  and  elastic  woolen  material,  with  canvas  shoes,  belt,  etc.,  complete, 
which  can  be  obtained  at  a  very  moderate  cost. 

Over-exertion,  and  consequent  over-heating,  are  both  injurious  to  the 
system,  and  when  these  occur,  the  regular  clothing  should  be  resumed 
without  delay,  and  change  of  temperature  avoided  until  the  body  has 
regained  its  natural  state.  In  many  gymnasiums,  the  hurtful  efiects  of 
necessarily  violent  exertion  are  guarded  against  by  the  apphcation  of 
friction  to  the  body  and  limbs,  removing  all  traces  of  perspiration,  and 
inducing  a  healthy  glow  on  the  skin,  and  also  by  the  use  of  a  plunge  bath 
provided  for  the  purpose. 

The  course  of  instruction  embraced  in  this  work  prescribes  the  exercises 
to  be  practised  upon  all  the  leading  apparatus  of  the  gymnasium,  and,  in 
the  methods  laid  down  and  their  progressive  arrangement,  valuable  aid  has 
been  gathered  from  the  work  on  Physical  Education  by  Archibald  Maclaren, 
of  the  University  Gymnasium  in  Oxford,  England,  and  casually  from  other 
technical  works  on  the  subject. 

A  well-appointed  gymnasium  generally  includes  several  minor  appliances, 
such  as  Pulley- Weights,  Rowing-Bench,  etc.,  but  their  object  and  use  are 
so  simple  and  obvious  as  to  require  no  special  explanation. 

A  high  degree  of  perfection  in  any  Art  involves  not  only  persevering 
effort  to  excel  but  some  degree  of  natural  aptitude,  and  success  is  depend- 
ent, first  on  innate  talents,  and  second  on  their  due  development. 

Even  in  Gymnastics  some  wiU  possess  a  high  degree  of  natural  adapt- 


8  JNTBODUCTION. 

ability  both  of  physical  form  and  flexibility  of  limb,  which  will  make  their 
progress  comparatively  easy  and  rapid ;  while  others,  who  are  less  gifted, 
will  arrive  at  the  same  proficiency  only  by  arduous  perseverance,  if  at  all. 

Taking  into  consideration,  however,  that  the  principal  aim  of  Gymnas- 
tics, from  an  educational  point  of  view,  is  physical  training  for  the  improve- 
ment of  the  human  frame,  and  not  for  any  special  pre-eminence  in  the  Art, 
no  one  should  feel  discouraged  nor  allow  himself  to  be  deterred  by  any  lack 
of  adaptabihty  from  reaping  all  the  benefit  he  can  from  the  advantages 
within  his  reach. 

If  the  student  possesses  ambition  to  excel,  and  perseverance  to  succeed, 
he  will  be  able,  by  following  instructions  faithfully,  to  perform  the  most 
daring  and  effective  acts  upon  the  Horizontal  Bar  and  Trapeze,  and  to 
apply  the  facilities  he  has  gained  to  the  conception  of  new  and  startling 
feats,  all  of  which  depend  upon  precision,  nerve  and  skill.  The  more  expert 
he  becomes,  the  more  surprised  will  he  be  to  find  how  former  difficulties 
appear  to  have  vanished ;  and  feats,  which  at  first  severely  taxed  his  powers, 
can  now  be  accomplished  more  by  volition  than  by  effort,  or,  more  strictly 
speaking,  by  both  working  together. 

This  change  is  due  not  only  to  actual  increase  of  strength  naturally 
resulting  from  the  training  he  has  undergone,  but  also  largely  to  the  experi- 
ence he  has  gained  by  which  he  is  able  intuitively  to  apply  the  proper  force 
at  the  right  moment.  This  is  a  great  acquirement ;  in  it  lies  the  secret  of 
some  of  the  most  astounding  feats  of  strength  and  dexterity,  and  without 
it  no  one  can  attain  perfection  in  the  Art  of  Gymnastics. 


TECHNICAL    TERMS. 


It  is  very  difficult,  and  in  some  cases  impossible,  to  give  clear  and  intelli- 
gent instructions  in  any  Art  without  having  recourse  to  Technical  Terms, 
which  consist  of  words  to  which  a  much  fuller  (and  sometimes  arbitrary) 
meaning  is  assigned,  than  the  mere  words  employed  would  otherwise  convey. 
The  use  of  such  terms  serves  to  avoid  needless  repetition  and  assists  greatly 
in  difficult  explanations. 

In  Gymnastics  but  few  of  these  are  needed,  but  whenever  they  occur  in 
the  course  of  the  instructions,  they  are  used  exactly  in  the  sense  that  is  givea 
in  their  definitions. 

The  Step  is  the  completed  action,  simple  or  compound,  of  which  certain  con- 
tinuous exercises,  as  climbing,  are  composed ;  every  successive  action 
throughout  such  exercises  being  but  a  repetition  of  the  first  step. 

The  Position  is  the  attitude  of  body  to  be  assumed  previous  to  the  initiatory 
step. 

The  Beach  is  the  point  to  which  the  hand  is  raised  on  the  full  upward  exten- 
sion of  the  arm. 

The  Half  Reach  m  the  point,  on  a  level  with  the  face,  to  which  the  hand  is 
raised  when  the  fore  -arm  is  bent  nearly  at  a  right  angle  with  the  upper 
arm. 

TJie  Best  is  the  point,  on  a  level  with  the  breast,  to  which  the  hand  is 
raised  or  lowered  when  the  arm  is  completely  bent. 

TJie  Distance  is  the  space  between  the  hands  when  they  are  stretched 
forwards,  the  width  of  the  shoulders  apart,  as  in  vaulting. 

Tlie  Space  is  the  distance  between  any  two  regularly  recurring  pomts  of  an 

apparatus,  as  the  rounds  of  a  ladder. 
Yielding  is  the  action  of  the  body  performed  to  avoid  shock  or  concussion  on 

dropping  from  a  height. 

9 


10  TECHNICAL     TEEMS. 

Every  form  of  leap  or  spring  terminates  in  a  position  of  body  similar  to 
that  taken  up  in  the  preliminary  movements  of  the  first  leap,  namely,  in  the 
depression  of  the  trunk  upon  the  hmbs,  and  the  bending  of  the  joints.  This 
is  done,  strictly  speaking^  neither  before  nor  after  the  descent  is  made,  but 
as  it  were  in  detail,  as  the  difierent  parts  of  the  body  successively  arrive; 
the  feet  first,  with  the  heels  raised ;  the  lower  hmbs  next,  with  the  knees 
bent ;  the  trunk  following,  pressing  the  hips  to  the  rear ;  the  whole  yielding 
to  the  encounter  with  the  resisting  ground,  and  thus  breaking  the  shock  or 
concussion. 

The  Leading  hand,  foot,  or  side,  is  the  one  which  takes  the  lead  in  any 
exercise. 

The  Supporting  hand,  foot,  or  side,  follows  the  leading  one. 

The  Meversed  Grasp  of  the  hand  is  when  the  palm  is  turned  inwards, 
towards  the  face. 

The  thumbs  and  fingers  are  said  to  be  together  when  in  grasping  an  object 
the  thumb  and  forefinger  do  not  separate  ;  they  are  said  to  be  meeting 
when  they  partly  or  wholly  encircle  an  object  and  meet,  or  nearly  so, 
from  opposite  sides. 


rEEE    EXEECISES 


Many  of  these  can  be  performed  by  several  parties,  or  an  entire  class,  at 
the  same  time,  and  are  intended  to  prepare  the  body  of  the  pupil  for  subse- 
quent and  more  difficult  exercises. 

At  the  command  of  the  leader,  '^  Fall  in,"  the  pupils  should  form  in  line, 
thus  :  Feet  close  together,  the  body  erect,  chest  out,  hands  on  hips,  thumbs 
bent  backward. 

At  the  command,  "  Half  Distance,"  the  first  in  Itue  remains  standing, 
while  the  others  step  aside,  each  touching  his  right  hand  neighbor's 
shoulder  with  his  extended  right  hand.     (See  Fig.  1,  a  and  6.) 


At  the  command,  ^^Whole  Distance,"  the  first  of  the  line,  who  is  left 
standing  alone  as  above  described,  extends  his  left  arm  sideways,  and  the 
others  step  aside  until  they  touch  with  their  extended  hands  the  points  of 
each  other's  fingers.  (See  Fig.  1,  c  and  d.)  The  distance  between  the 
pupils  will  be  regulated  by  the  exercises  which  the  teacher  intends  to 
practise. 

11 


12 


FREE    EXERCISES. 


What  are  termed ''  Free  Exercises,"  are  intended  to  strengthen  the  legs, 
and  give  flexibility  to  the  hips  and  back.  The  bending  of  the  back  should 
be  practised  with  the  greatest  care,  in  order  to  avoid  accidents.  Free 
exercises  cannot  be  too  highly  recommended ;  they  are  indispensable  to 
every  gymnast,  and  greatly  assist  at  exercises  upon  fixed  instruments. 

1.  Lie  on  your  back,keep  the  body  rigid,  with  the  arms  close  to  the  sides, 
legs  and  heels  in  the  same  line.  Without  moving  the  lower  limbs  raise  the 
body  perpendicularly  from  the  hips  upward.  If  the  first  efifort  is  not  successful 
try  again.    Clasp  the  hands  over  the  head  and  repeat  the  effort. 


Fig.  2. 


2.  Turn  the  face  downwards,  extend  the  body 
longitudinally,  hands  turned  inward,  the  fingers 
pointed  to  each  other ;  the  body  must  be  supported 
by  the  toes  and  the  strength  of  the  arms.  Allow  the 
body  to  sink  gradually,  bending  the  arms  slightly,  still 
keeping  the  body  extended,  without  permitting  the 
stomach  to  touch  the  floor.  Kiss  the  fingers  of  each 
hand  alternately  and  slowly  return  to  the  first  posi- 
tion.   Eepeat  the  exercise  several  times. 

3.  Stand  erect  with  the  right  arm  extended  hor- 
izontally to  front  in  a  hne  with  the 
shoulder,  raise  the  right  leg  as  high  as 
possible  without  bending  the  knee,  re- 
turn to  the  first  position,  and  perform 
the  same  exercise  with  the  other  arm 

and  leg.  Eepeat  ten  times.  (Fig.  2.)  This  is  simply  attempt- 
ing to  kick  the  extended  hand  with  the  toe  without  bending 
the  knee. 

4.  Stand  erect  with  the  heels  close  together,  stretch  out 
the  arms  horizontally  to  the  front  of  the  body  in  a  hne  with 
the  shoulders,  fingers  extended  and  the  palms  close  together, 
slowly  separate  the  hands,  keeping  them  at  the  same  le^,^, 
the  arms  straight,  and  endeavor  to  make  the  backs  of  the 
hands  meet  behind  the  back.      Repeat  frequently. 

5.  Stand  erect  with  the  arms  folded  behind,  draw  up  the 
right  thigh  rapidly,  as  high  as  possible,  the  body  remaining  perfectly  erect, 
Repeat  with  the  left  thigh.  Practise  this  exercise, 
breast  with  ease.  (Fig.  3.) 


until  the  thighs  touch  the 


FBEE    EXERCISES. 


13 


Fig.  4. 


Fig.  5. 


6.  Stand  erect  with  the  hands  resting  on  the  hips.  (Fig.  \-a.)    Bend  the 

right  knee  and  extend  the  left  leg  as  shown 
in  Fig.  4.  Make  the  movement  alternately 
from  one  foot  to  the  other.  The  weight  o1 
the  body  rests  on  the  point  of  the  toe  of  the 
bent  leg ;  the  extended  leg  should  not  be 
bent  at  the  knee.  Repeat  several  times. 

7.  Stand  erect  as  in  the  last  exercise, 
keep  the  legs  straight  and  rigid.  Raise 
the  heels  slowly  from  the  ground  bending 
'the  toe -joints  as  much  as  possible.  Prac- 
tise this  exercise  until 
able  to  stand  on  the 
tips  of  the  toes. 
8.  Position  as  in  the  sixth  exercise.  Lower  the 
body  until  the  breech  touches  the  heels.  (Fig.  5.)  Re- 
peat 'frequently.  Vary  the  exercise  by  hopping  back- 
wards, forwards  and  sideways.  This  is  an  excellent 
exercise  for  the  toes,  ankles  and  knees.  It  will  require 
much  practice  to  perform  the  exercise  on  the  extreme 
tips  of  the  toes  as  shown  in  the 
engraving. 

9.  Stand  erect  with  the  arms      /''  n^**' 
extended  horizontally  in  front  in 
a  hne  with  the  shoulders.    Extend  the  left  leg  in  front 
of  the  body  in  a  line  with  the  hip.    Bend  the  right 
knee  gradually  until  the  breech  touches  the  ground. 
(Fig.  6.)  Repeat  alternately  with  both  legs. 

10.  Position  as  in  the  sixth  exercise.  Kneel  grad- 
ually until  both  knees  touch  the  ground ;  then  rise 
again  slowly,  without  moving  the  hands  or  feet,  and 

position.  This  exercise  may  be  varied  by  crossing  the 
bending  the  knees  slowly,  and  setting  as  a  tailor  or  a  Turk  ;  from  this 
)osition  rise  without  moving  the  hands  from  the  hip.  Repeat  both  exercises. 
]  1.  Position  same  as  sixth  exercise.  Throw  the  left  leg  backwards  so  as  to 
touch  the  breech  with  the  heel.  (Fig.  7.)  Repeat  alternately  with  right  and  left 
leg.  The  body  and  thighs  must  be  kept  straight,  and  the  motion  must  be  quick. 


14 


FREE     EXERCISES. 


12.  Position  same  as  the  ninth  exercise. 
Bend  the  body  forward  without  bendin<?  the 
knees,  so  as  to  touch  the  ground  with  out- 
stretched fingers,  or  with  the  full  hand. 
(Fig.  8.)    Repeat. 

"  J  3.  Position  same  as  ninth  exercise.  Bend 
tiie  body  forward  so  as  to  place  the  head 
between  the  knees ;  legs  to  be  kept  straight. 
Fig.  9.)    Repeat. 

14.  Stand  erect,  legs  close  together,  arms  extended  hori- 
zontally, sideways,  on  a  line  with  the  shoulders,       Fig.  9. 
the  body  forming  a  *^  cross." 

Move  the  body    sideways,    alternately  from 
right  to  left  as  represented  in  Fig.   10.     Both 
lege  must  be  kept  straight. 

15.  Stand  erect  with  the  hands  clasped 
behind  the  back.  Bend  the  right  knee,  extend 
the  left  leg  horizontally  to  the  rear,  reach  the 
^  "^A  l^ody  forward  and  endeavor  to  take  from  the 

/o^. )         ground  a  piece  of  wood  not  more  than  half  an  inch  in  diam- 


-^ig. 


eter.  (Fig.  11),  no  part  of 

the  body  excepting  the 

one    foot  to    touch   the 

ground.     Return  to  first 

position  and  repeat  al- 
ternately with  right  and 

left  leg. 

16.  Position  same  as 

sixth  exercise.  Jump  up, 
spread  the  legs  wide  apart  and  close  them 
before  alighting.  Keep  the  toes  pointed 
and  the  hands  on  the  hips. 

17.  Jump  over  a  stick,  grasped  by  both 
hands,  forward  and  backward  as  shown  in  Fig.  12. 

18.  Bend  the  body  forward,  with  arms  extended  in  front,  until  the  palms 


rest  flat  upon  the  floor  a  trifle  in  advance  of  the  feet 
of  the  body  forward  upon  the  hands,  and 


throw  the  weight 


having  established  a  good  bal- 


FREE    EXERCISES. 


15 


ance  upon  tlieni; 

are  balanced  in 

Fiff.l2. 


[Fig.  13. 


raise  the  body  and  legs  upwards  until  they 
a  perpendicular  position,  as  seen  in  Fig.  18.^ 
The  same  result  may  also  be  attained  by 
the  method  described  for  the  "  Handspring." 
(See  second  exercise  in  Tumbling.) 

When  the  foregoing  exercises  have  been 
perseveringly  practised,  and  a  fair  degree  of 
proficiency  attained  in  their  performance,  the 
learner  will  be  well  prepared  for  feats  requir- 
ing some  degree  of  nerve  as  well  as  dexterity. 

He  will  now  have  acquired  the  method  of 
obtaining  a  steady  balance  in  various  positions 
of  the  body,  and  also  of  preserving  it  while  in 
motion.    This  is  a  very  necessary  acquisition,  and  confers  confi- 
dence, which  in  its  turn  gives  the  requisite  nerve  to  attempt 
more  daring  feats. 

He  will,  therefore,  be  ready  to  apply  what  he  has  learned  to  the  mote 
difficult  exercises  cf  Tumbling. 


TUMBLIITG 


The  several  exercises  embraced  in  what  is  popularly  called  Tumbling,  are 
all  very  arduous,  and  require  great  resolution,  pluck,  aud  constant  practice 
to  achieve  in  a  satisfactory  manner;  nothing  but  perseverance  against 
repeated  failure,  will  enable  the  tyro  to  overcome  these  difiiculties.  Begin- 
ners should  not  attempt  these  exercises  except  upon  a  mattrass,  and  under 
the  instruction-  of  an  experienced  teacher.  To  prevent  accidents  the 
Lungers  should  be  used  when  practising.     (See  Fig.  5,  page  19.) 

1.  The  Upstart ;  or  Backspring.—Lie  on  the  back,  at  full  length,  upon  a 
large  mattrass,  place  the  arms  as  shown  in  Fig.  1,  Fig.  1. 

palms  of  the  hands  downward  upon  the  mattrass, 
raise  the  legs  over  the  head,  throwing  the  weight 
of  the  body  on  the  shoulders  (Fig.  1),  and  with  a 
good  spring  from  the  hands  and  shoulders,  and  a 
quick  movement  forward,  throw  the  legs  forward 
and  endeavor  to  bring  them  down  smartly  under 
the  body,  making  the  feet  describe  a  semi-circle, 
and  at  the  same  time  lifting  the  body  as  much  as 
possible  in  the  effort.  The  learner  will  probably  find  that  as  soon  as  he  has 
made  the  semi-circle,  all  control  of  the  body  will  be  lost,  and  he  will  fall  on 
his  back,  instead  of  coming  up  on  his  feet.  The  chief  thing,  therefore,  is  to 
bring  the  feet  under,  and  on  the  ground  as  rapidly  as  possible,  and  simul- 
taneously, as  the  feet  are  near  touching,  to  bring  the  hands  forward  so  as 
preserve  a  balance  when  an  upright  position  is  being  attained. 

Another,  and  more  difficult,  way  of  performing  this  feat,  is  as  foUows  : 
Instead  of  putting  the  palms  of  the  hands  on  the  mattrass,  place  them 
upon  the  thighs,  roll  over  on  the  shoulders  as  shown  in  Fig.  1,  spring  forward 
from  the  shoulders,  and  as  the  semi-circle  is  being  described  by  the  feet 
assist  the  movement  by  pushing  the  thighs  with  the  hands,  snap  the  feet 
under  the  body  very  rapidly  and  come  to  an  erect  position.  This  feat  will 
require  to  be  practised  over  and  over  again,  and  will  tax  the  patience  of  the 
gymnast  before  it  can  be  performed  with  anything  like  ease  and  precision. 

16 


TUMBLING. 


Yt 


The  ''Upstart"  is  a  great  favorite  with  performers,  and  is  often  em- 
ployed to  mitigate  the  mortification  of  failure  when  the  unfortunate  gymnast, 
attempting  some  diflficult  feat,  happens  to  land  to  his  back. 

2.  The  Hand  spring. — Stand  erect,  place  the  right  leg  a  little  in  advance 
of  the  other,  the  body  slightly  bending  backward  and  the  arms  raised 
Fiff.  2.  perpendicularly  above  the  head  (Fig.  2).     Spring  for- 

ward upon  the  hands,  throw  the  left  leg  quickly  over,  in- 
stantly followed  by  the  right  leg.  Now  comes  the  critical 
point  of  the  whole  movement — during  the  moment  that 
the  hands  are  on  the  ground  keep  the  arms  still,  chest 
out,  head  back,  and  just  as  the  legs  are  going  over, 
(Fig.  3),  sprmg  with  the  arms  pushing  from  the  fingers, 
and  this  combined  with  the  original  spring  will  enable  the 
gymnast  to  execute  a  complete  circle  landing  on  his  feet. 
This  is  a  difficult  feat,  and  can  only  be  accom- 
plished after  persistent  efibrt.  The  novice  will  fall  back 
often  and  again,  but  after  repeated  trials  will  succeed 
in  coming  on  his  feet  with  his  legs  very  much  bent 
under  the  body;  continued  practice,  however,  will  enable 
him  to  come  over  and  assji&ie  an  erect  position,  ready 
to  perform  a  second  h^m-spring  if  necessary. 


3,  TheFlip-Fli 

one  end  of 


for  Back-Hand-spring.— Stand  on 

iss,  (which  may  be  raised  a  little) 
the  back  towards  it,  legs  slightly 
apart,  arms  straight ;  bend  down  slightly 
for  a  spring  backwards,  quickly  throw  the 
arms  and  head  back,  and  bending  the  up- 
per part  of  the  body  backwards,  at  the 
same  time  throw  the  legs  upward  over  the 
head,  pitch  over  on  the  hands,  and  with 
quick  spring  from  the  hands  and  arms 
come  over  and  alight  on  the  feet. 

This  feat  is  considered  to  be  much 
more  difficult  than  the  Forward  Hand- 
spring. The  Flip-Flap  may  be  executed 
from  the  position  of  '*  Bending  the  Crab  " 


18 


TUMBLING. 


(see  Fig.  4)  and  many  gymnasts  learn  how  to  accomplish 
it  in  that  way.  All  backward  exercises  require  more 
practice  and  confidence  than  forward  movements. 


Fig.  4. 


4.  The  Forward  Somersault.— Stand  erect  with  the 
arms  raised  up  perpendicularly,  take  a  short  run,  jump  np 
from  both  feet  at  once  (which  should  be  a  little  apart), 
throw  the  arms  down  and  the  head  and  shoulders  forward 
with  a  quick  spring,  at  the  same  time  gathering  the  legs 
behind.  At  this  point  the  chief  difiBculty  is  to  get  suffi- 
cient impetus  to  turn  the  body  completely  around  and  ahght'ontAe  feet, 
and  in  this,  great  assistance  may  be  obtained  from  what  is  technically 
known  as  the  ''catch."  When  the  jump  is  made  sufficiently  YaghJcatch  the 
hands  on  the  under  part  of  the  thighs  just  above  the  knees  am  pull  the 
knees  up  to  the  body,  letting  them  go  when  alighting.  In  the  catch,  the 
arms  being  suddenly  arrested  when  in  violent  action,  their  momentum  is  im- 
parted to  the  lower  part  of  the  body,  thus,  in  a  great  degree,  assisting  in 
making  the  turn. 

This  exercise  is  very  difficult  to  execute  in  a  finished  style ;  the  beginner 
usually  makes  a  plunge  head  foremost  as  if  diving  into  the  water;  pitching 
over  on  to  his  back,  and  gi^vdng  himself  a  good  shaking  up ;  this  has  such  a 
discouraging  effect  that  he  is  apt  to  feel  hke  giving  up  the  exercise,  but  con- 
tinued effort  soon  begets  confidence,  and  this,  backed  by  determination,  soon 
enables  him  to  accomplish  the  feat. 

6.  The  Backward  Somersault.— Stand  erect  with  the  feet  a  little  apart, 
and  the  arms  raised  perpendicularly,  bring  the  arms  down  with  a  quick 
swinging  motion,  raise  them  quickly,  as  high  as  possible,  as  if  with  an  effort 
to  raise  the  body,  at  the  same  instant,  with  a  powerful  spring,  throw  the  legs 
right  over  the  head,  catching  the  thighs,  and  gathering  the  legs  and  body 
up  as  it  were,  and  you  will  in  time  turn  over,  and  come  in  an  upright  posi- 
tion before  the  head  has  time  to  touch  the  ground. 

This  exercise  must  be  practised  on  a  good  mattrass,  and  with  the  assist- 
ance of  the  Lungers. 

The  Lungers  consist  of  an  article  of  which  there  should  be  some  two  or 
three  in  every  gymnasium,  and  be  constantly  used  by  gymnasts,  especially 
by  beginners,  whenever  any  fear  is  entertained  of  being  unable  to  go  through 
any  exercise  without  help  of  some  kind. 


TUMBLING.  19 


The  Lungers  are  composed  of  a  strong  leather  belt  or  strap,  about  li  or 
l^uich  wide,  with  a  strong  buckle  wherewith  to  fasten  it  round  the  waist  of 
the  gymnast ;  two  metal  fastenings  or  swivels  are  fastened  to  the  sides  of 

Fig.  5. 


the  belt  (See  Fig.  5),  to  which  two  ropes,  about  f  of  an  inch  in  diameter  and 
4  feet  long,  are  fixed. 

The  strap  being  adjusted  round  the  waist  of  the  gymnast,  two  assistants, 
each  taking  hold  of  a  rope,  stand,  one  on  either  side  of  him,  and,  no  matter 
what  exercise  he  is  about  to  try — he  need  be  under  no  fear  of  any  mishap, 
for,  should  a  slip  occur,  all  that  the  assistants  have  to  do  (they  having  had 
their  eyes  fixed  upon  him  all  the  time),  is  quickly  to  pull  the  rope  firmly 
upwards,  and  he  is  safe. 


THE  LEAPIIsrG  POLE. 


The  exercises  with  the  Leaping  Pole  may  ahnost  be  viewed  as  belonging 
to  recreative  rather  than  systematized  exercise,  being  essentially  for  the 
open  air^  and  among  the  few  which  may  be  left  for  free  practice,  after  the 
learner  has  acquired  a  knowledge  of  the  action  and  position  of  the  different 
exercises.  They  are  valuable  as  giving  precision  to  the  eye  and  hand,  the 
faculty  of  calculating  distance,  and  of  rapidly  determining  the  moment  for 
executing  a  complicated  movement,  with  the  presence  of  mind  to  execute  it, 
in  addition  to  the  physical  exercise  of  the  run  and  leap,  the  balance  and 
descent. 

The  Leaping  Pole  should  be  of  ash,  about  1 1  inches  in  diameter,  and  from 
nine  to  ten  feet  long,  perfectly  smooth,  and  shod  with  iron  at  the  butt  or 
lower  end. 

Fig.  1.  Fig.  2. 


1.  To  Leap  DistBUce.— Position  of  attention,  one  pace  from  the  mark, 
with  the  pole  at  the  balance,  i.e.  held  horizontally  across  the  body  with  the 

20 


TRE     LEAPING     POLE. 


21 


arms  bent,  the  butt  of  the  pole  held  slanting  to  the  front,  the  hands  at  the 
distance,  the  right  hand  to  the  front,  the  palms  of  the  hands  upwards,  the 
fingers  and  thumbs  meeting;  or  with  the  palm  of  the  right  hand  downwards. 

1.  Advance  the  right  foot  to  the  edge  of  the  mark,  advance  the  butt  of 
the  pole  to  the  utmost  reach,  and  fix  it  on  the  ground  without  displacing  the 
feet  or  changing  the  grasp  of  the  hands  (Fig.  1). 

2.  Spring  from  the  feet,  and  pass  by  the  left  of  the  pole,  the  whole  body 
with  the  lower  limbs  straight  and  extended  in  one  line  when  passing  the 
pole  (Fig.  2) ;  descend  yielding,  and  as  the  feet  meet  the  ground  raise  the 
pole  to  the  balance. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  advancing  the  left  foot  to  the  mark,  the  left 
hand  to  the  front,  and  passing  by  the  right  of  the  pole. 


2.  To  Leap  Height. 
Fig.  3. 


■Position  as  in  first  exercise,  a  short  distance  from 
the  barrier  (in  proportion  to  its  height). 

1.  As  in  first  exercise,  advancing  th  e  butt  of 
the  pole  to  within  a  few  feet  of  the  barrier 
(according  to  its  height). 

2.  Spring  from  the  feet  and  clear  the  barrier, 
passing  by  the  left  of  the  pole,  the  body  in  pubi- 
tion  as  in  first  exercise  when  clearing  the  barrier 
(Fig.  3) ;  after  clearing  the  barrier,  quit  the  grasp 
of  the  pole,  throwing  it  back  to  the  starting- 
point,  and  descend  yielding,  facing  the  barrier. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  advancing  the 
left  foot,  the  left  hand  to  the  front,  and  passing 
by  the  right  of  the  pole. 

3.  To  Leap  De^^.— Position  as  in  first  exer- 
cise, the  toes  at  the  edge  of  the  platform. 

1.  Advance  the  pole  and  firmly  plant  the  butt 

""^  on  the  ground. 

2.  Press  lightly  from  the  feet,  quit  the  platform  or  ground,  passmg  by 
the  right  of  the  pole,  the  trunk  of  the  body  in  the  line  of  the  pole  when 
passmg  it,  the  lower  limbs  at  a  right  angle  with  it,  the  toes  pointed  to  the 
front ;  contmue  the  descent  (Fig.  4),  and  when  nearing  the  ground  quit  the 
grasp  of  the  pole,  throw  it  slightly  to  the  left,  and  descend  yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  passing  by  the  left  of  the  pole. 

DepartBiMt  of  Phyiical  Muottloa 

UnlYftraity  of  California 

103  Gy^rnftslum  for  ll^n 

Berkal«y  4.  California 


22 


THE    LEAPING    POLE. 


4.  To  Leap  Width. — Position  of  attention  twenty  or  thirty  paces  from 
the  edge  of  the  place  to  be  cleared,  or  ditch;  the  pole  at  the  balance,  the 


right  hand  to  the  front. 

J.  Begin  the  advance 
"with  a  short,  light,  and  well- 
measured  step,  fixing  the 
eye  on  the  ditch  and  regard- 
ing it  steadily,  quicken  the 
pace  when  nearing  it,  select 
the  spot  and  plant  the  pole 
without  halt,  springing  by 
the  left,  the  position  of  body 
and  lower  limbs  as  in  first 
exercise,  descend  yielding, 
bringing  the  pole  to  the  bal- 
ance. 

This  exercise  to  be  re- 
peated, advancing  the  left 
foo^,  passmg  by  the  right  of  the  pole,  the  left  hand  to  the  front. 

These  four  exercises  are  amply  sufficient  to  give  the  learner  full  command 
of  the  leaping-pole  j  they  will  teach  him  how  to  preserve  his  balance  when 
depending  upon  the  pole  for  support,  and  serve  to  give  him  the  confidence 
and  nerve  necessary  for  more  difficult  gymnastic  exploits. 


THE     YATJLTIN"G    HOESE. 


The  exercises  on  the  Vaalting  Horse  can  scarcely  be  too  frequently 
practised,  as  they  give  valuable  and  widely  varied  employment  to  both  upper 
and  lower  limbs,  as  well  as  to  the  trunk.  This  apparatus  is  always  found 
an  excellent  one  with  which  to  begin  the  lesson  in  gymnastics,  because  it 
affords  much  and  rapid  movement  without  severe  or  localized  effort.  The 
exercises  are  divided  into  two  very  distinctly  marked  series,  and  admit  of 
progressive  practice  long  after  the  correct  action  and  position  have  been 
attained,  by  increasing  the  elevation  of  the  horse. 

The  first  series  is  introductory  to  the  second,  and  the  different  exercises 
may  be  performed  upon  a  horse  devoid  of  neck  or  pommels.  The  secoud 
series  is  very  artistic  and  effective,  and  cultivates  to  the  highest  attainable 
point  that  precision  and  security  of  grasp  and  spring  which  are  so  valuable 
in  exercises  when  practically  applied.  A  few  general  hints  will  be  found  of 
great  importance  to  the  tyro. 

Before  making  a  spring  from  a  run,  strike  hoth  feet  fuU  and  fiat  upon  the 
^ound.  When  standing  beside  the  horse,  the  reverse  is  the  case,  and  the 
jspring  is  made  from  the  toes. 

When  alighting  on  the  ground,  do  so  on  the  toes,  and  descend  yielding 
{see  Technical  Terms^a^e  9) ;  if  these  precautions  are  not  observed  a  sudden 
ahock  will  be  the  consequence. 

The  horse  is  made  of  various  lengths, 
but  the  two  sizes  generally  in  use  are  those 
of  G  feet  and  4  feet  long,  the  former  size 
having  the  neck  slightly  raised  {see  illus- 
tration), while  the  latter  may  or  may  not 
have  this  modification. 

The  width  of  the  horse  should  be  some- 
what less  than  the  distance  between  the 
^   parallel  bars,  say  about  19  inches,  the 
neck-piece  in  the  larger  horse  tapering  a  little  towards  the  end,  and  raised 


23 


24  THE     VAULTING    HORSE. 

about  3  inches  above  the  level  of  the  back  of  the  horse ;  in  the  larger  horse 
the  neck-piece  begins  about  4  feet  from  the  opposite  end  or  croup,  and  will 
therefore  be  2  feet  long. 

The  horse  is  generally  covered  with  leather,  or,  as  some  prefer,  with 
stout  canvas,  and  padded  at  the  sides  to  make  it  a  little  softer,  in  the  event 
of  the  legs  coming  in  contact  with  it  when  not  required,  and  likewise  to 
ensure  its  being  perfectly  smooth  all  over,  and  to  prevent  the  chance  of  a. 
splinter  being  met  with  while  being  used. 

The  legs  being  made  hollow,  and  having  a  sliding  leg  inside,  it  can  be 
raised  to  any  height,  varying  from  the  exact  height  of  the  horse,  which, 
should  be  about  3  feet  6  inches,  to  about  6  feet,  the  horse  being  kept  at  the 
required  height  by  4  iron  pins,  one  of  them  passing  through  one  of  the  holes, 
made  in  each  sliding  or  loose  leg. 

The  pommels  are  cut  circular,  and  fit  into  two  grooves  cut  across  the 
back  of  the  horse,  about  6  inches  down  the  sides,  and  are  kept  in  their  places 
by  means  of  an  iron  pin  fixed  to  each,  which,  passing  through  the  body  of 
the  horse,  is  screwed  tight  with  a  nut  underneath.  These  pommels  are  to 
be  placed  the  same  distance  apart  as  the  parallel  bars,  viz.  19  inches,  which 
they  also  resemble  in  point  of  size,  to  enable  them  to  be  readily  grasped, 
and  should  therefore  be  about  4  inches  above  the  back  of  the  horse,  and 
placed  about  the  middle  of  it  as  it  stands  upon  the  legs.  The  pommels  may 
be  covered  in  the  same  manner  as  the  horse,  and  they  should  be  hollowed 
a  little  on  the  sides,  to  allow  the  fingers  to  have  a  firmer  grasp.  Besides, 
the  above,  two  flush  pommels  must  be  made,  which  are  to  replace  the  others 
when  not  required,  and  which,  when  fixed  in  their  places,  make  the  back  of 
the  horse  apparently  smooth. 

Should  the  gymnasium  not  allow  of  a  portion  of  it  being  boarded  (in 
which  case  the  horse  is  placed  on  the  tanned  part  close  to  the  edge  of  the 
flooring),  a  kind  of  spring  board  is  necessary  to  give  the  feet  a  firm  footing 
in  making  a  spring,  or  '^  beat "  off.  This  board  is  made  of  thick  wood  about 
3  feet  long  by  2^  feet  broad,  and  composed  of  narrow  pieces  of  5  or  6  inchea 
wide,  securely  fastened,  forming  a  small  platform,  bevelled  oft'  at  one  edge 
and  the  opposite  edge  elevated  somewhat  from  the  ground  by  a  cross  piece 
underneath  it. 


THE     VAULTING    HORSE. 


25 


EXERCISES  ON  A  HORSE  WITHOUT  POMMELS. 

The  position  of  the  instructor  should  be  close  to  the  horse  in  front 
of  the  learner,  directmg  every  motion,  and  in  the  early  stages  of  his 
practice  counting  the  time  of  his  movements,  and  pointing  out  to  him  the 
features  of  the  position  in  the  ascent,  rest  and  descent.  The  instructor 
should  also  repeatedly  execute  the  exercise  himself  in  the  manner  most  likely 
to  make  the  learner  comprehend  its  peculiarities,  at  the  same  time  encour- 
aging him,  if  tunid  or  hesitating,  and  losing  no  opportunity  of  obtaining  his 
entire  confidence  and  trust  in  every  situation  however  critical,  remembering- 
always  that  nothing  will  so  readily  make  a  man  fall  as  the  fear  of  fallmg. 

1.  To  Vault  upon  the  Horse  in  Two  Movements— PosiYiow  of  attention 
close  beside  the  horse. 

1.  liaise  the  hands  and  place  them  at  the  distance  (see  Technical  Terms) 
on  the  back  of  the  horse,  the  thumbs  and  fingers  straight  and  together,  and 
pointed  to  the  front  (Fig.  1);  bend  the  legs,  spring  from  the  ground, 
inclining  the  body  to  the  front,  press  strongly  with  the  hands,  extend  the 


Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 


arms,  and  raise  the  trunk  of  the  body  above  the  horse,  the  legs  straight  and 
together,  the  feet  together,  and  pointed  to  the  ground  (Fig.  2). 

2.  Elevate  the  right  leg,  and  by  a  continuous  movement  bring  it  over 
the  back  of  the  horse,  the  column  of  the  body  turning  with  it,  and  as  the 
right  thigh  approaches  the  right  hand,  advance  the  latter  in  a  hue  with  the 


THE     VAULTING     HORSE. 


left  hand,  and  slowly  lower  the  body  on  to  the  saddle,  bringing  the  head 
erect  and  the  chest  and  trunk  well  advanced,  the  hands  hghtly  resting  on 
the  thighs ;  the  lower  limbs  pendent,  the  toes  pointed  Y\g.  3. 

to  the  front  (Fig.  3). 

In  descending,  Incline  the  head  and  trunk  of  the 
"body  to  the  front,  elevate  the  left  leg  to  the  rear  until 
it  clears  the  back  of  the  horse,  the  right  rising  to  meet 
it,  press  from  the  hands,  and  descend  yielding,  facing 
the  horse. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  left. 

2.  To  Vault  Tlpon  the  Horse  in  Cne  Movement.— 

Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1  and  2.  As  is  first  exercise,  except  that  the  right 

leg  should  ascend  and  clear  the  back  of  the  horse,  in  a 

continuous  movement  from  the  ground  to  the  seat  in  the  saddle. 

„.     ,  Descend  as  in  first  exercise. 

Fiff  4. 
°*  This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  left. 

3.  To  Vault  Over  the  Horse  in  Two  Movements. — 
Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise  to  the  extension  of  the  arms 
(Fig.  4). 

2.  Elevate  both  limbs  in  position  to  the  right,  and 
pass  them  over  the  horse,  incline  the  head  and  shoul- 
ders forward,  advancing  the  right  hand  in  a  line  with 
the  left  (Fig.  5),  press  from  both  hands,  and  descend 
yielding,  facing  the  horse. 

This  exercise  to  be  Fig.  5. 

repeated,  passing   by 
the  left. 

4.  To  Vault  Over  the    Horse   in    One 

Movement.— Po5^^i■o?^  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  and  2.  As  in  preceding  exercise,  ex- 
cept that  the  legs  should  ascend  and  clear 
the  back  of  the  horse  in  one  continuous 
movement ;  after  the  advance  of  the  right  hand,  press*  strongly  from  both 
and  descend  yielding,  facing  the  horse. 


THE    VAULTING    H  0  B  8  E. 


27 


As  the  body  clears  the  horse  the  trunk  and  lower  limbs  should  be 
extended  in  the  line  of  the  horse,  the  arms  bent,  the  chest  advanced,  the 
head  thrown  back. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  passing  by  the  left. 

5.  To  Vault  Upon  the  Horse  Resting  on  the  Knees.— -Position  as  in  first 
exercise. 

1.    Raise  the   hands  and  Fig.  6.  Fig.  7.  Fig.  8. 

place  them  at  tlie  distance  on 
the  back  of  the  horse,  as  in 
first  exercise ;  bend  the  legs, 
spring  from  the  ground,  press 
strongly  with  the  hands,  in- 
chne  the  head  and  shoulders 
forward,  extend  the  arms, 
and  bring  the  knees  straight 
up  between  them,  resting  on 
the  saddle  (Fig.  6).  In  de- 
scending, rapidly  throw  the 
hands  to  the  front,  as  high 


face,  spring  with  the 


lower 
ward 


limbs,      up- 
and    forward 


(Fig.  7),  and  descend  yielding  (Fig.  8). 

6.  To  Vault  Upon  the  Horse  Resting  on  the  'Feet— Position  as 
in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  preceding  exercise,  except  that  the  knees  should  be 
brought  up  between  the  arms  until  they  are  as  high  as  the  breast, 
and  the  feet  (instead  of  the  knees)  brought  to  rest  ou  the  saddle; 
i^imediately  straighten  the  legs  and  come  to  the  position  of  atten- 
tion (Fig.  9). 

In  descendmg,  spring  straight  to  the  front,  and  descend  yielding. 

7.  To  Vault  Over  the  Horse  Between  the  Hands.— Posi^tow  as 
in  first  exercise. 

I.  As  in  preceding  exercise,  except  that  the  feet,  instead  of  resting 
on  the  saddle,  should  be  shot  through  the  space  between  the  hands 
(Pigs.  10,  11,  and  12) ;  press  from  the  hands,  and  descend  yielding. 


THE     VAULTING    H  O  B  S  E. 


Fig.  10. 


Fig.  11. 


Fig.  12. 


8.  To  Vault  Upon  the  Horse  With  One  Hand. — Position  of  attention  facing 
the  line  of  the  horse. 

1 ,  Eaise  the  left  hand  and  place  it  Fig.  13. 
on  the  horse,  and  extend  the  right  arm 
to  the  rear  (Fig.  13). 

2.  Bend  the  legs  as  in  first  exercise 
and  spring,  elevating  the  right  leg,  and 
pass  it  over  the  horse,  at  the  same  time 
rapidly  elevating  the  right  arm  above  the 
head,  the  hand  closed,  and  come  to  the 
seat  in  the  saddle  (Fig.  14). 

In  descending,  incline  the  head  and 
shoulders  to  the  front,  press  strongly 
from  the  left  hand  and  descend  as  in 
first  exercise. 

This  exercise  to  be  re-  Fig.  14, 

peated  with  the  right  hand. 

9.  To  Vault  Over  the 
Horse  With  One  Hand.— 
Position  as  in  eighth  exer- 
cise. 

1.  As  in  eighth  exercise. 

2.  As  in  eighth  exercise 
to  the  spring ;  press  strong- 
ly vith  the  left  hand,  ele- 
vate the  right,  pass  the  lower  limbs  in  position  over  the  horse  (Fig.  15)  and 
descend  yielding,  facing  the  horse. 


THE     VA  ULTING    HORSE. 


29 


This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  right  hand. 


10.  Running  Vault  Upon  the  Horse. - 

from  the  horse. 


-Position  of  attention  25  or  30  feet 


I.  Slowly  begin  the  run,  quickening  the 
pace  on  the  advance,  and  looking  straight 
at  the  horse ;  when  within  2  or  3  feet  of  the 
horse,  spring  from  both  feet,  striking  them 
full  and  flat  upon  the  ground,  the  hands  tak- 
ing their  place  on  the  back  of  the  horse  im- 
mediately after  the  spring,  pass  the  right  leg 
over  the  horse,  and  come  to  the  seat  in  the 
saddle  in  one  movement,  as  in  Fig.  3. 

In  descending,  incline  the  head  and  trunk 
of  the  body  to  the  front,  elevate  the  lower 
limbs  to  the  rear  straight  above  the  horse, 
the  toes  pointed  upward  (Fig.  16) ;  slowly  let 
the  lower  limbs,  with  the  entire  column  of 
the  body  fall  to  the  right  and  gradually  de- 
scend over  the  arm  until  the  feet  come  to  the 
ground,  the  horse  on  the  right  (Fig.  17) ;  de- 
scend yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  left. 

II.  Running  Vault  Over  the  Horse.— Po- 

sition  as  in  tenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  tenth  exercise,  quickening  the 
pace  to  the  utmost  speed;  spring  as  m  preceding  exercise,  passing  the  lower 


Fig.  18. 


limbs  over  the  horse  to  the  right  (Fig.  18), 
advance  the  right  hand  opposite  the  left, 
-^  pressing  strongly,  and  descend  yielding,  fac- 
ing the  horse. 

In  this  exercise  the  body  should  be  thrown 
well  forward  in  the  spring,  the  feet  should 
describe  a  semicircle,  beginning  at  the  point 
where  they  quit  the  ground,  and  finishing 
where  they  ahght,  the  hands  being  the  centre 
upon  which  the  trunk  and  lower  lunbs  turn ;  during  this  exercise,  therefore, 


30 


THE     VAULTING    HOUSE. 


the  chest  should  be  continually  turning  towards  the  horse,  the  legs  should 
he  straight  and  together,  the  toes  pointed,  the  whole  body,  when  in  the  act 
of  clearing  the  horse,  forming  one  horizontal  line  over  it. 
This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  left. 

12.  Running  Vault  Upon  the  Horse,  Resting  on  the  'KnQt^.—Fosition  as 
in  tenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  tenth  exercise;  spring  straight  to  the  front,  the  hands  taking 
their  place  on  the  back  of  the  horse  immediately  after  the  spring,  bring  both 
legs,  with  the  knees  closely  bent  up,  between  the  arms  and  come  to  rest  on 
the  knees,  as  in  fifth  exercise.  Fig.  6. 

Descend  as  in  fifth  exercise.  Figs.  7  and  8. 

13.  Running  Vault  Upon  the  Horse,  Resting  on  the  "Feet— Posit io7i  as  in 
tenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  preceding  exercise,  except  that  the  feet,  instead  of  the  knees, 
are  placed  on  the  saddle,  straighten  the  legs,  as  in  sixth  exercise.  Fig.  9. 

In  descending,  extend  the  arms,  spring  straight  to  the  front,  and  descend 
yielding. 

14.  Running  Vault  Over  the  Horse  Between  the  Rsmds.— Position  as  in 
tenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  preceding  exercise,  except  that  the  legs  are  still 
more  closely  bent  up,  and  the  feet  instead  of  resting  on  the  sad- 
dle, are  shot  through  between  the  hands,  as  in  seventh  exercise, 
Figs.  10,  11,  and  12;  press  from  the  hands  as  the  feet  clear  the 
horse,  and  descend  yielding. 


Fi^.  19. 


15.  Running  Vault  Over  the  ^^'  ^' 

Horse  by  the  Back  Lift.-  Po- 
sition  as  in  tenth  exercise i      \^ 

1.  As  in  tenth  exercise  to  th( 
spring ;  place  the  hands  upon 
the  horse,  depress  the  head  and 
shoulders  until  the  latter  are 
as  low  as  the  hands,  and  at 
the  same  time  elevate  the 
lower  limbs,  hips,  and  loins  by 

the  rear,  until  they  rise  perpendicularly  over  the  hands  (Fig.  19),  the  legs 
straight  and  together,  the  toes  pointed  upwards;  continue  the  sweep  of 


THE     VAULTING     HORSE. 


31 


the  lower  limbs,  let  the  feet  fall  backwards  beading  the  back  inwards  (Fi;^. 
20),  and  descend  yielding. 

Fig.  21.  16.  Eunning  Vault  Over  the  Horse  With  One 

Hand. — Position  as  in  tenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  tenth  exercise  to  the  spring;  place  the 

left  hand  on  the  back  of  the  horse,  throw  the  right 

arm  above  the  head,  and  pass   the   lower  limbs 

over  the  horse  (Fig.  21),  lean  forward  when  clear- 

yj   ing  it,  press  strongly  with  the  left  hand,  and  de- 

'z/^"  scend  yielding,  the  horse  on  the  left. 

exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  right 


This 
hand. 


Fig.  22. 


17.  Running  Vault  to  the  Croup.— Pos^^^on  of  attention  25  or  ^feet  from 
the  horse,  facing  the  croup. 

1.  Slowly  begin  the  run,  quickening  the  pace  on  the 
advance,  and  when  within  2  or  3  feet  of  the  croup,  spring 
from  both  feet,  immediately  placing  the  hands  on  the 
croup,  right  and  left ;  fully  separate  the  lower  limbs  dur- 
ing the  rise,  and  as  the  body  reaches  the  croup  advance 
the  hands  G  or  8  inches  along  the  back  of  the  horse,  and 
lightly  sink  to  the  seat  on  the  croup  (Fig.  22) ;  the  head 
and  column  of  the  body  slightly  inclined  to  the  front,  the 
lower  limbs  straight,  the  toes  pointed  to  the  front. 

In  descending,  incline  the  head  and  trunk  to  the 
horizontal  line  of  the  horse;  elevate  the  lower  limbs, 
straight  and  together, until  they  are  in  a  line  with  the  body  (Fig.23),  shoot  them 
out  far  to  the  rear,  at  the  same  time  pressing  from  the  hands,  and  descend 

yielding,  facing  the  croup. 

18.  Running  Vault  to  the  Saddle.— Po5i- 

tion  as  in  seventeenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  preceding  exercise,  until  the  lower 
limbs  rise  above  the  croup,  but  instead  of  al- 
lowing them  to  rest,  continue  the  momentum 
of  the  spring,  rapidly  advance  both  hands  to 
the  saddle  and  Mghtly  sink  to  the  seat,  place 
the  hands  on  the  thighs,  the  head  erect,  the  breast  advanced,  as  in  Fig.  3. 


32 


THE     VAULTING     HOUSE. 


Fig.  25. 


In  descending,  replace  the  hands  on  the  horse  (Fig.  24),  elevate  the  loTver 
limbs,  and  descend  as  in  tenth  exercise,  Figs.  16  and  17. 

19.  Running  Vault  to  the  Croup,  Resting  on  the  Fig.  24. 
Knees.— Po5i7iow  as  in  seventeenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  seventeenth  exercise  to  the  spring;  bring 
both  legs,  with  the  knees  closely  bent,  up  between  the 
arms,  and  let  them  lightly  rest  on  the  croup  between 
the  hands  (Fig.  25). 

In  descending,  incline  the  head  and  trunk  of  the 
body  to  the  front,  slowly  elevate  the  lower  limbs,  and 
shoot  them  to  the  rear,  as  in  seventeenth  exercise  (Fig. 
23),  and  descend  yielding. 

20.  Running  Vault  to  the  Croup,  Resting  on  the 
Feet. — Position  as  in  seventeenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  preceding  exercise,  except  that  the  knees  are 
lifted  above  the  croup,  as  high  as  the  breast,  and  the  soles 
of  the  feet  placed  on  the  horse,  straighten  the  legs,  rising 
from  the  palms  to  the  tips  of  the  fingers,  and  stand  upright 
on  the  croup  (Fig.  26). 

In  descending,  re-bend  the  knees,  spring  backwards,  and 
descend  yielding,  facing  the  croup. 

21.  Running  Vault  to  the  Croup,  the  Legs  on  the  Right- 
Position  as  in  seventeenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  seventeenth  exercise  to  the  spring,  but  instead  of 
separating  the  lower  limbs,  keep  them  together,  and  during  the 
rise  to  the  croup,  pass  them  to  the  right,  and  slowly  sink  to  the 
side -seat  on  the  croup  (Fig.  27). 

Fig..  27  In   descending,   incline    the    head    and 

shoulders  to  the  front,  press  strongly  from 
the  hands,  elevate  the  lower  limbs  over  the 
horse  until  they  are  above  the  head  (Fig.  28), 
slowly  let  the  lower  limbs,  with  the  entire 
column  of  the  body,  fall  to  the  left,  and 
gradually  descend  over  the  arm,  until  the 
feet  come  to  the  ground,  the  horse  on  the 
left. 


THE    VAULTING    HORSE. 


33 


Fig.  28. 


This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  left,  descending 
on  the  right. 

Running  Vault  to  the  Croup,  the  Legs  Passing  From 
Right  to  Left, — Position  as  in  seventeenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  preceding  exercise,  until  the  rise  above  the 
croup,  but  instead  of  allowing  the  legs  to  rest  upon  it, 
continue  the  momentum  of  the  spring,  lifting  the  right 
hand,  and  extending  it  rapidly  above  the  head,  and  carry 
the  limbs  forward  and  upward  over  the  horse  in  front 
(Fig.  29),  and  turning  completely  round  upon  the  left 
hand,  descend  yielding,  facing  the  line  of  the  horse,  the 
horse  on  the  left  (Fig.  30). 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  the  legs  passing  from 
left  to  right. 


EXEECISES  ON  THE  HOKSE  WITH  POMMELS. 

The  more  diJBBcult  of  the  following  exercises  should  not  be  attempted 
until  the  whole  of  the  preliminary  exercises  have  been  mastered  by  progres- 
sive practice. 


Fig.  29. 


Fig.  30. 


23.  Preliminary  Exercises.— I.  Po- 
sition of  attention  close  beside  the  horse, 
directly  opposite  the  pommels. 

J .  Kaise  the  hands  and  place  them  on 
the  pommels  (Fig.  31),  spring  from  the 
ground,  projecting  the  chest  well  for- 
ward, press  strongly  with  the  hands,ex- 
tend  the  arms,  and  raise  the  trunk  of 
the  body  above  the  horse  (Fig.  2),  carry 
the  legs  well  back,  without  bending 
them,  and  at  the  same  time  well  against 
the  side  of  the  horse.  Descend  yield- 
ing. 

Repeat  this  exercise  several  times 
without  pausing  between  the  ascent  and 
descent,  making  one  continuous  move- 
ment of  the  whole. 


34 


THE     VAULTING    HORSE. 


n.  Position  of  attention  25  or  SO  feet  from  the  horse. 

1 .  Same  as  in  last  exercise  but  with  a  preparatory  run.  Slowly  begin 
a  run,  quickening  the  pace  on  the  advance ;  when  within  2  or  3  feet  of  tho 
horse,  spring  from  both  feet,  striking  them  full  Fig.  31. 

and  flat  upon  the  ground,  the  hands  grasping  the 
pommels  at  the  same  time  the  spring  is  made. 
Elevate  the  body, the  arms  extended,  and  descend 
again  yielding. 

Kepeat  this  exercise  several  times  without 
pausing  between  the  movements. 

III.  Proceed  as  in  exercise  I,  and  after  the 
body  is  upright  carry  the  right  leg  up  at  the  side 
of  the  horse  into  a  horizontal  position,  but  with- 
out touching  the  horse,  then  let  it  drop  again,and 
carry  up  the  left  leg  in  like  manner. 

Repeat  this  exei'cise  elevating  each  leg  three 
times  in  succession,  without  resting  or  touching  the  ground  between  the 
movements. 

IV.  Proceed  as  in  the  last  exercise,  but  carry  up  both  legs  (instead  of 
one),  as  slowly  as  possible,  first  to  the  right,  then  to  the  left,  keeping  them 
straight  during  the  movements.  The  trunk  must  not  be  carried  too  much  in 
the  opposite  direction  to  the  legs  j  a  slight 
deflection  of  the  body  cannot  always  be  avoided, 
but  the  more  upright  the  trunk  is  kept,  the 
greater  will  be  the  benefit  derived,  and  the  more 
graceful  the  execution  of  the  exercise. 

Repeat  this  exercise,  elevating  both  legs  three 
times  in  succession  each  way,  without  resting  or 
touching  the  ground  between  the  movements. 

V.  Repeat  exercise  II,  and  as  the  body  rises 
carry  the  trunk  a  Uttle  to  the  right,  then  give 
it  a  slight  turn  to  the  left,  elevate  the  right  leg 
and  throw  it  over  the  horse  facing  the  pommels  (Fig.  32).  As  the  grasp 
upon  the  pommels  is  not  to  be  relinquished  during  the  execution  of  this  exer- 
cise, the  body  must  necessarily  be  inclined  a  little  forward. 

To  dismount,  incline  the  head  and  trunk  well  forward,  raise  the  body, 


THE    VAULTING    HORSE.  35 

bring  the  right  leg  over  the  horse  again,  and  by  a  judicious  use  of  the  wrists^ 
alight  on  the  ground  as  far  from  the  horse  as  possible,  yielding. 
Repeat  this  exercise  without  the  run. 

VI.  Same  as  preceding  exercise,  but  turn  the  trunk  to  the  right,  and 
carry  the  left  leg  over  the  left  side  of  the  pommels  (near  the  neck-piece) 
facing  the  pommels,  and  looking  towards  the  croup. 

Dismount  as  in  the  preceding  exercise. 
Repeat  this  exercise  without  the  run. 

VII.  Same  as  exercise  V,  see  Fig.  32.  Lean  well  forward  and  dismount^ 
spring  up  again,  instantly,  and  carry  the  left  leg  over  the  horse  as  in 
exercise  VI. 

This  exercise  may  be  repeated  several  times,  alternately  employing  the 
right  and  left  leg. 

24.  The  Swinging  Exercise. — Position  of  attention  dose  beside  the  horse, 
directly  opposite  the  pommels. 

1.  As  in  the  preceding  exercise  (VII),  but,  instead  of  alighting  on  the 
ground,  let  the  body  resume  an  upright  attitude  without  allowing  the  feet 
to  touch  the  ground  or  the  arms  to  be  bent,  and,  then  without  any  other 
spring  than  that  which  can  be  given  to  the  body  when  suspended  in  that 
position,  carry  the  left  leg  over  the  horse,  descend  and  resume  the  first  posi- 
tion ;  then  carry  the  right  leg  over  again,  repeating  the  exercise  three  times 
each  way,  alternately,  without  permitting  the  feet  to  touch  the  ground.  The 
legs  should  be  kept  perfectly  straight,  but  not  stiff.  The  head  and  trunk 
should  be  inclined  a  little  forward  each  time  the  leg  is  carried  over  the  horse; 
this  will  make  the  exercise  less  difficult  to  execute.  This  exercise  is  also 
called  the  '^  Saddle  Vaulting  Movement." 

25.  The  Reverse  Swing.— Position  as  in  preceding  exercise. 

1.  Proceed  as  in  exercise  V,  page  34,  but  instead  of  resting  between  the 
change,  lean  the  body  forward,  throw  the  whole  weight  upon  the  arms,  and, 
while  bringing  the  right  leg  back,  give  the  body  a  kind  of  turn  towards  the 
opposite  end  of  the  horse,  and  throw  the  left  leg  over  it,  facing  the  croup.  To 
reverse  the  movement,  lean  forward  as  before,  and,  as  the  body  turns,  throw 
the  right  leg  over  again,  the  legs  each  time  describing  a  semicircle. 

When  able  to  accomplish  this  with  ease,  practise  it  with  a  quicker  move- 
ment, which  will  give  it  the  nature  of  a  swing. 

26.  Mounting. — Position  as  in  twenty-fourth  exercise. 

1.  Grasp  the  pommels,  one  with  each  hand  (Fig.  3J),  spring  up,  giving 


36 


THE     VAULTING    HOUSE. 


the  body  a  turn  towards  the  left,  pass  the 
right  leg,  well  extended,  over  the  croup 
into  the  saddle,  at  the  same  time  shifting 
the  hand  to  the  front  pommel  (Fig.  33). 

Repeat  the  same  exercise,  pass  the  left 
leg  over  the  horse,  making  use  of  the  left 
hand  where  the  right  is  stated,  and  the  .•-**^ 
right  for  the  left;  dismount  by  either  of  the 
following  methods,  though  all  three  should 
be  practised : 

To  dismount : 

i^'irsi.— Place  one  hand  on  either  pom- 
mel,   then,    raising  up,  bring    the   right 
leg  back  over  the  horse,  and  alight 
on  the  ground,  yielding. 

Second. — Place  both  hands  on  the 
front  pommel,  lean  forward  so  as  to 
throw  the  whole  weight  of  the  body 
upon  the  arms,  bring  the  right  leg 
over  the  horse,  and  alight,  yielding, 
as  far  as  possible  from  the  horse. 

Third. — Place  the  right  hand  on  the 
saddle  with  the  wrist  turned  towards 
the  left,  and  grasp  the  pommel  with 
the  left  hand,  then,  throwing  the 
body  forward  as  before,  alight  on 
ground,  yielding. 

27.  Swinging  Round  the  Circle.- 
sition  as  in  twenty -fourth  exercise. 

1.  Grasp  the  pommels,  one  with  each 
hand  (Fig.  31);  spring  up,  pass  both  legs 
over  the  croup  (Fig.  34-a)  behind  the  sad- 
dle (&)  and  jump  to  the  ground.  Return 
the  same  way  by  a  strong  impulse  of  the 
body,  completely  round  the  horse,  spread- 
ing the  left  leg  (c)  and  bringing  the  body 
into  a  sitting  position  in  the  saddle. 


Pig.  33. 


THE    VAULTING    H  0  B  S  K 


37 


28.  The  Maiden  Jump. — Position  as  in  twenty -fourth  exercise. 

1.  Grasp  the  pommels,  spring  up,  let  go  the  left  hand,  pass  the  right  leg 


Fig.  36. 


\ 


•^. 


over  the  horse  (Fig.  35)  and  light  on  the 
saddle.  Return  in  same  manner  to  first 
position. 

29.  The  Roll  OYer.— Position  of  attention 
close  beside,  but  with  the  back  to  the  horse. 
1.  Raise  the  arms  behmd  and  grasp  the 
pommels,  fingers  outward  and  thumbs  in- 
.\.  ward,  so  as  to  place  the  elbows  a  little  be- 
\  I  yond  the  centre  of  the  saddle  (Fig.  36-a), 
;  lift  the  lower  limbs  with  a  strong  impetus 
/  (6) ;  carry  the  body  over  the  head  (c),  relin- 
/  quish  the  grasp  of  the  pommels  when  the 
feet  are  on  a  level  with  the  head,  and 
alight  on  the  ground.  Keep  the  legs 
straight,  and  the  feet  together.  In  the  early  stages  of  practice  this  exercise 
should  be  performed  slowly,  gradually  increasing  the  rapidity  of  the  move- 
ments until  it  can  be  executed  without  pause. 

30.  The  Hugging  Jvcmg.— Position  as  in  twenty-fourth  exercise. 

Y{„  ^.  1  •  Vault   to  the  saddle   as   m   the   twenty-sixth 

exercise. 

2.  Embrace  the  neck  of  the  horse,  and  with  a 
powerful  effort  throw  the  legs  over  so  as  to  aUght  on 
the  ground,  with  back  to  the  front  of  the  horse 
(Fig.  37). 

31.  The  Giant  Leap;  or  Long  Hy.— Position  as  in 
the  seventeenth  exercise.  The  jumping  board  should  be 
placed  about  3  feet  from  the  croup. 

1.  Vault  to  the  saddle  as  in  the  eighteenth  exercise, 
and  dismount. 

2.  Place  the  board  a  little  farther  off,  vault  as  be- 
fore, pitching  on  to  the  hands  first,  and  bring  the  feet 
up  on  to  the  back  of  the  horse  in  a  stooping  position, 

then  raise  and  pitch  forward  with  the  hands  on  to  the  neck  of  the  horse  and 
go  over  as  in  leap-frog. 


38  THE     VAULTING    HORSE. 

This  must  be  persevered  Pi^r.  33. 

in  until  the  gymnast  is  able     /^   "^^s^^^^  r^x 

to  jump  the  whole  length  of  ^n^^T!^'"""^^^^^"^)^^^^'^;!^       y^^^SX^ 
the  horse  by  resting  the  hands         '^-.'""^^^v^"'^'^     \  \\        (^^ r^ 
on   it    but  once.      (Fig.  38.)  ^^>.J^'"--,/'      Vn\      V^v 

When  commencing  to  practise  ^ — "^"^''^^^^^^^''Tr^^Hir^ 

this  exercise  it  is  better  to  use  {  ll'''''"il-  Vr^ 

a,  shorter    horse,   and   when  x^^  l-'-'l  " "^>^'''^^-— ^^Sv 

able  to  go  over  that  with  ease  /M"  ^'^  ^ — r\\  ^V' 

try  a  longer  one.    Amattrass  '  I/I  111  • 

and  an  assistant  will  serve  to  guard  against  any  mishap  when  practising  this, 
as  well  as  similar  exercises. 

In  all  of  the  vaulting  exercises,  the  learner  must  proceed  with  great 
caution  at  first ;  he  will  find  that  sometimes  his  legs  will  come  in  contact 
with  the  horse  with  more  violence  than  is  agreeable ;  but,  as  he  gains  dex- 
terity, and  becomes  familiar  with  the  various  movements,  he  will  discover 
that  in  these,  as  in  all  gymnastic  exercises,  will-power  and  determination  will 
wipe  out  difficulties  which  at  first  are  discouraging. 

Whenever  the  spring  has  to  be  made  for  a  vaulting  movement,  he  must 
be  sure  to  make  sufficient  spring  to  accomplish  the  end  in  view ;  but,  at  the 
same  time,  he  must  be  exceedingly  careful  not  to  apply  more  force  to  his 
spring  than  is  actually  necessary,  because  the  excess  of  motion  attained  is 
likely  to  lead  to  violent  contact  with  the  horse,  and  consequent  contusions. 

These  exercises  are,  therefore,  especially  valuable  for  training  the  judg- 
ment, and  obtaining  full  control  of  the  muscular  powers. 


THE    HOEIZOlsrTAL    BAE. 


Taking  all  things  into  consideration  this  may  be  said  to  be  the  most  use- 
ful of  all  apparatus  in  a  gymnasium.  The  variety  of  the  feats  that  may  be 
performed  upon  it,  and  its  adaptability  to  being  raised  or  lowered,  as  the 
nature  of  the  exercises  or  the  age  of  the  gymnast  requires,  makes  it  very  at- 
tractive. The  exercises  on  the  horizontal  bar  bring  into  play  nearly  all  the 
muscles  of  the  body,  but  those  most  exercised  nnd  benefitted  are  the 
muscles  of  the  arms,  wrists,  hands,  chest,  spine,  loins,  hips,  legs,  and  ab- 
domen. 

The  Horizontal  or  Stationary  Bar  also  affords  the  means  of  practising 
and  perfecting  movements  which  are  performed  upon  the  swinging  bar  or 
trapeze. 

The  position  of  the  instructor  should  be  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  bar, 
facing  the  learner. 

The  Horizontal  Bar  should  be  made  of  ash  or  hickory  (specially  selected 
for  its  straightness  and  freedom  from  knots)  turned  perfectly  round.  If 
inches  in  diameter,  except  at  the  ends,  where  the  shoulders  or  tenons, 
should  be  formed  to  shde  up  and  down  in  the  grooves  between  the  stand- 
ards. The  bar  should  be  bored  throughout  its  length,  and  a  specially  tem- 
pered steel  rod  or  corCj  |  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  inserted,  terminating  at  each 
end  in  a  brass  cap,  fitting  the  shoulder  of  the  bar.  The  standards  should  be 
7  feet  apart,  and  7  feet  high,  formed  in  two  pieces  with  a  space  or  continu- 
ous groove,  of  If  inches  between  them  to  receive  the  shoulders  at  the  ends  of 
the  bar,  and  pierced  with  holes  2  inches  apart,  through  which  moveable 
wrought-iron  pins  are  inserted  for  the  bar  to  rest  on.  Thus  the  bar  may  be 
adjusted  to  any  desired  height. 

To  ascertain  the  proper  height  for  the  bar,  stand  on  tiptoes  and  reach  up 
so  as  to  just  touch  it  with  both  hands,  this  height  will  enable  the  gymnast  to 
swing  clear  of  the  ground  when  hanging  by  the  hands. 

1.  Hanging  by  the  Hands. — Position  of  attention  facing  the  bar. 

J .  Spnug  from  the  ground  and  grasp  the  bar,  the  hands  at  the  distance^ 

39 


40  THE     HORIZONTAL     BAR. 

the  fingers  and  thumbs  together  {see ''  Technical  Terms");  the  arms  straight, 
the  trunk  of  the  body  upright,  the  legs  straight  and  together,  the  feet  to- 
gether, and  the  toes  pointed  to  the  ground. 

2.  Remain  suspended  as  long  as  possible  without  over-fatigue. 

This  simple  exercise  may  be  varied  by  hanging  by  each  hand  alternately, 
letting  the  other  hang  straight  down  by  the  side.  This  exercise  may  also  be 
varied  by  raising  the  body  and  lowering  it  alternately  with  the  right  and 
left  arm. 

2.  To  Swing  By  The  Arms. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 
1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2-  Swing  the  legs  and  body  a  little  in  front,  then  suddenly  drop  them, 
swing  forward  again  and  endeavor  to  gain  sufficient  impetus  on  the  return 
oscillation  to  almost  describe  a  semi-circle  and  carry  the  body  back  and 
beyond  the  bar ;  similar  motions  given  to  the  legs  and  body  when  dropping 
from  behind,  on  the  return  forward  swing,  will  cause  them  to  rise  higher  to 
the  front  than  before,  and  these  movements  repeated  will  soon  enable  the 
learner  to  swing  the  body  forward  and  backward  above  t\iQ)  level  of  the  bar. 
When  practising  ixxoidi  jerking  the  legs. 

Do  not  be  afraid  of  swinging  too  high,  as  many  feats,  to  be  hereafter  men- 
tioned, depend  greatly  on  the  neatness  of  the  swing,  and  the  facility  with 
which  the  requisite  height  is  obtained. 

Swing  backward  and  forward  five  or  six  times,  and  leave  the  bar  in  the 
forward  swing  when  the  feet  have  risen  to  a  level  with  the  face.  Just  be- 
fore releasing  the  hands  from  the  bar,  a  slight  forward  impetus  should  be 
given,  by  a  spring  from  the  wrists — this  will  enable  the  learner  to  alight  on 
the  toes. 

This  method  of  leaving  the  bar  gives  a  neat  finish  to  a  great  many  of  the 
succeeding  exercises,  and  should,  therefore,  be  practised  until  the  learner 
can  alight  on  his  toes,  in  a  graceful  manner,  at  some  distance  forward  from 
the  bar. 

Another,  and  fully  as  graceful  a  method  of  leaving  the  bar,  is  to  watch 
for  the  exact  point  of  equipoise  at  the  end  of  a  backward  swing  ;  and  then, 
letting  go  of  the  bar,  drop  gracefully  to  the  ground. 

The  point  of  equipoise  is  obtained  when  the  swing  assumes  a  direction 
somewhat  above  the  horizontal  fine  of  the  bar. 

3.  To  Rise  Above  the  Bar,  the  Right  Leg  Acting.— PostYiow  of  attention 


THE    HORIZONTAL     BAR. 


41 


Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 


Fig.  3. 


under  the  bar,  the  shoulders  being  at  right  angles 
to  the  bar. 

1.  Sprmg  from  the  ground  and  grasp  the  bar  with 
both  hands,  rigbt  and  left  of  the  bar,  the  left  in  ad- 
vance, the  fingers  and  thumb  meeting. 

2.  Bend  the  arms,  lift  the  lower  limbs,  separat- 
ing the  feet  as  they  rise,  pass  the  left  leg  over  the 
bar,  resting  on  it  under  the    knee,  pass  the  right 

leg  over  the  left,  the  calf  of  the  right  overlying  the  in- 
step of  the  left,  the  head  held  back,  the  trunk  sus- 
tained. 

3.  Quit  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  pass  it  under  the 
bar  to  the  opposite  side  next  the  body  and  grasp  the 
bar,  elevate  the  elbow  and  rest  the  fore-arm  along  the 
bar'  (Fig.  1) ;  detach  the  right  leg  from  the  left,  straighten 
it  and  rapidly  swing  it  under  the  bar,  with  a  momentum 
suificient  to  enable  the  body  to  rise  above  it,  press 
strongly  with  both  hands,  extend  the  arms,  advance  the 
left  leg,  and  rest  above  the  bar  (Fig.  2).  In  descending 
re-bend  the  right  arm,  draw  back  the  left  leg,  lower 
the  body,  and  place  the  right  leg  over  the  left  as  in  the 
ascent ;  sustain  the  body,  detach  the  legs  from  the  bar, 
straighten  the  arms,  and  descend  yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  with  the 
left  leg  acting,  the  right  hand  in  advance, 
the  right  leg  resting  on  the  bar. 

4.  To  Swing  up  Above  the  Bar  Outside 
of  the  Arms. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Swing  forward,  and  at  the  moment 
the  body  is  extended  horizontally  and  at 
arms  length,  throw  the  head  back,   and 

-.7-^7";.  raise  the  left  leg  over  the  bar  to  the  left  of 
""'^    ;  the  arms  (Fig.  3,  a),  the  momentum  of  the 
/  return  swing  aided  by  the  arms,  will  bring 
/    the  body  above  the  bar  m  a  sitting  posi- 
tion. 


THE     HORIZONTAL     BAR. 


Eepeat  the  exercise  by  throwing  the  right  leg  over  the  bar. 
This  exercise  should  be  practised  until  it  can  be  done  without  the  least 
pause  in  the  movements. 

5.  To  Swing  up  Above  the  Bar  Be- 
tween the  Arms. — Position  as  in  first 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Same  as  last  exercise,  except  that 
the  left  leg  is  passed  between  the  arms 
instead  of  outside,  or  on  the  one  side  of 
them.     (Fig.  4.) 

Repeat  with  the  right  leg. 

6.  To  Turn  Round  the  ^tlx.— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise,  the  fingers  and  thumb  meetiu 

2.  Lift  the  lower  limbs  in  position  to  the  front  until 
the  feet  are  as  high  as  the  bar,  retaining  the  arms 
straight  (Fig.  5) ;  bend  the  arms,  carry  the  feet  and  lower 
limbs  over  the  bar,  letting  the  hips  pass  up  the  side  of  the 
the  bar  and  over  it,  while  the  head  and  shoulders 
ascend,  the  legs  descending  to  the  rear,  until  the  whole 
body  has  cleared  the  bar,  and  rests  in  a  perfectly  vertical 
line  on  the  hands,  above  the  bar,  the  arms  extended 
(Fig.  12). 

In  descending,  set  the  body  free  from  the  bar,  straighten  the  arms,  and 
descend  yielding. 

7.  To  Turn  Round  the  Bar,  the  Hands  Reversed Position  as  in  first 

exercise. 

1.  As  in  precedmg    exercise,  but  with  the  grasp  of  the  hands    re- 
versed.   See  ''  Technical  Terms.^' 

2.  As  in  preceding  exercise,  retaming  the  reversed  grasp  of  the  hands. 
In  desccndmg,  bring  the  elbows  close  in  Fig.  6.  ' 

by  the  sides,  tighten  the  grasp  of  the  hands, 
slowly  incline  the  head  and  shoulders  to  the 
front,  elevate  the  lower  limbs  to  the  rear,  sus- 
taining the  body  upon  the  fore-arms  (Fig.  6); 
return  over  the  bar,  passing  the  body  again 


under  it,  bring  the  lower  limbs  to  the  vertical 
line,  and  descend  yielding. 


THE    HORIZONTAL    BAR. 


43 


8.  To  Rise  to  the  Bar. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 


Fig.  7. 


Fig.  8. 


1.  As  in  sixth  exercise  (Fig:.  7). 

2.  Bend  the  arms,  raising  the  body  un- 
til tlie  chin  rises  above  the  bar  (Fig.  8 , 
sink  again  to  the  full  extension  of  the  arms 
quit  the  grasp,  and  descend  yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the 
lower  limbs  extended  horizontally  to  the 
front. 

This  exercise  should  be  repeated  three 
six,  nine,  twelve,  or  more  times  consecu- 
tively and  without  pause,  according  to  the 
capacity  of  the  learner. 

The  same  exercise  may  bo  repeated 
with  the  grasp  reversed. 

9.  To  Rise  Above  the  Bar  by  the  Fore- 
arm, Right  and  Left. — Position  as  in  first 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  sixth  exercise. 

2.  Bend  the  arms  until  the  chin  rises  above  the  bar, 
raise  the  right  elbow  and  extend  the  fore-arm  along  the 
surface  of  the  bar,  the  left  elbow  following  on  the  left  (Fig. 
9),  press  strongly  with  the  hands,  straighten  the  right 
arm  to  its  full  extension,  the  left  following,  and  remain 
sustained  by  the  hands,  in  the  vertical  line,  above  the 
bar. 

In  descending,  let  the  left  fore-arm  return  to  the  bar, 
the  right  following,  pass  the  left  fore-arm  beneath  the 
bar,  the  right  following,  quit  the  grasp,  and  descend 
yielding. 

10.  To  Rise  Above  the  Bar  by  the  Forearm,  Both 
Sands  at  Once. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  preceding  exercise. 

2.  Bend  the  arms  as  in  preceding  exercise,  raise  both  elbows  and  extend 
T)oth  fore-arms  along  the  surface  of  the  bar,  press  strongly  with  the  hands. 


Pig.  9. 


44 


THE    HORIZONTAL     BAB. 


Fijj.  10. 


straighten  both   arms  to  their  full  extension,  aud  rise  above  the  bar  as  in 
preceding  exercise. 

In  descending,  let  both  fore-arms  slowly  return  to  the  bar,  pass  both 
arms  beneath  the  bar,  quit  the  grasp  and  descend  yielding. 

11.  To  Rise  Above  the  Bar,  Right  and  Left. 
— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1 .  As  in  sixth  exercise. 

2.  Bend  the  arms  until  the  chin  rises  above  .the 
bar,  and  raise  the  right  elbow  vertically  above  the 
bar,  (Fig.  10),  the  left  following,  straighten  both 
arms  to  their  full  extension,  and  rise  above  the  bar 
in  the  vertical  line,  as  in  preceding  exercise. 

In  descending,  re-bend  the  left  arm,  the  right 
following,  let  the  left  arm  sink  below  the  bar,  the 
right  following,  straighten  the  arms,  and  descend  yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  hand 
leading. 

12.  To  Rise  Above  the  Bar,  Both  Hands  at  Once.— 

Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  sixth  exercise. 

2.  Bend  the  arms  until  the  chin  rises  above  the  bar, 
and  without  pause  press  strongly  upon  the  bar  with 
both  hands  at  once,  continue  the  upward  raoveme 


Fig.  12. 


and  rise  above  it  (Fig.    11),  immecl 

completing  the  extension  of  the  arms,  and 

sustain  the  body,  on  the  hands,  in  the  veriical  line  above  the 

bar  (Fig.  12).  This  series  of  movements  to  be  executed  without 

pause  and  at  the  same  pace  throughout. 

In  descending,   slowly  re-bend  the  arms,  sink  beneath  the 
bar,  quit  the  grasp,  and  decend  yielding. 

13.  To  Rise  Above  the  Bar  Backwards,  Right  and  Left.— . 
Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  sixth  exercise,  but  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand  re- 
versed. 

2.  Raise  the  lower  limbs  by  the  front  in  position  until  the  feet 
are  as  high  as  the  bar,  pass  the  feet  under  the  bar,  between  the 


THE     HORIZONTAL     BAB. 


45 


iands,  straighten  the  lower  limbs  and  let  them  descend  by  the  rear  (Tig.  13), 
elevate  the  right  side  of  the  body,  bringing  it  close  up  by  the  bar,  and 
pressing  strongly  with  the  right  hand  until  the  fore-arm  is  straight  above 
the  bar,  slackening  but  not  quitting  the  grasp  of  the  left  hand  (Fig.  14) ; 
support  the  weight  of  the  body  entirely  on  the  right  arm,  quit  the  grasp  of 
the  left  hand  and  re-grasp  the  bar  at  the  distance  beyond  the  right,  at  the 
same  time  turning  the  breast  fully  round  to  the  bar,  and  resting  equally 
on  both  hands  (Fig.  15) , 

Fig.  13.  Fig.  14.  Fjg^  15 


In  descending,  reverse  the  movements  of  the  ascent,  or  descend  as  in 
twelfth  exercise. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  left  and  right. 

14.  To  Rise  Above  the  Bar  Backwards,  Both  Hands  at  Once.— Position 
as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  sixth  exercise  but  the  grasp  of  both  hands  reversed. 

2.  As  in  preceding  exercise  to  the  elevation  of  the  right  fore-arm  above 
the  bar ;  from  this  point  instead  of  quitting  the  grasp  of  the  left  hand, 
elevate  the  left  side  and  raise  the  fore-arm  above  the  bar,  press  strongly 
from  both  hands  and  rise  seated  on  the  bar. 

In  descending,  reverse  the  movements  of  the  ascent. 

15.  The  Leg  Swing  Backward.— Posi^iow  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Swing  up  on  the  bar  as  in  fourth  exercise. 

2.  Grasp  the  bar  with  both  hands,  the  fingers  and  thumbs  meeting, 


46  THE    HORIZONTAL    BAR, 

throw  the  right  leg  as  far  behind  as  possible,  slipping  the  left  leg  backward, 
and  catching  the  bar  by  the  bend  of  the  knee,  keej)  the  arms  straight, 
throw  the  head  back,  and  with  a  good  swing  of  the  right  leg,  make  one 
turn  backward  round  the  bar. 

The  pupil  will  soon  find  that  in  this  exercise  the  pj^  ^^ 

great  difficulty  to  be  avoided  is  making  a  half  turn  too 
much  (See  Fig.  ]6),  a  little  practice,  however,  will  en- 
able him  to  regulate  the  swing  so  as  to  come  up  on  the 
bar  and  remain  there,  as  shown  in  Fig.  3. 

When  the  pupil  finds  himself  in  the  above  awk- 
ward position,  his  only  escape  from  the  dilemma  is  to 
"  swing  up  "  on  the  bar  and  proceed  as  before. 

After  the  gymnast  has  learned  to  execute  one  turn 
on  the  bar  with  ease,  the  exercise  should  be  practised,  with  the  right  and 
left  leg  alternately,  until  several  revolutions  can  be  executed  without  stop- 
ping. 

16.  The  Leg  Swing  Forward— Pos^^^ow  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Swing  up  on  the  bar  as  in  fourth  exercise. 

2.  Reverse  the  grasp  of  the  hands,  throw  the  whole  weight  of  the  body  on 
the  arms,  the  body  erect,  and  head  well  to  the  front,  keep  a  firm  grasp  with 
the  hands,  throw  the  body  well  forward,  keeping  as  far  as  possible  from 
the  bar,  and  make  one  turn  round  the  bar. 

Practise  with  the  right  and  left  leg  alternately,  until  several  revolutions, 
can  be  executed  without  stopping. 

The  pupil  is  liable  to  experience  a  difficulty  exactly  the  reverse  of  the 
one  referred  to  in  the  description  of  the  last  exercise,  from  want  of  confi- 
dence, when  plunging  forward,  he  is  apt  to  keep  too  close  to  the  bar  and 
thus  prevent  the  body  from  getting  sufficient  swing  or  impetus  to  make  a 
complete  turn.     This  difficulty  will  soon  be  overcome  with  a  little  practice. 

17.  To  Sit  on  the  Bax.— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Else  above  the  bar  as  in  twelfth  exercise  (Fig.  12). 

2.  Throw  the  left  leg  over  the  bar  (Fig.  2),  grasp  the  bar  with  the  left 
hand  outside  the  left  thigh,  throw  the  right  leg  over  the  bar,  grasp  the 
bar  with  the  right  hand  outside  the  right  thigh,  and  assume  an  upright 
sitting  position.     For  another  method  see  fourteenth  exercise. 

18.  To   Sit  on  the  Bar,  (Slow  Movement).— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 


THE    HORIZONTAL    BAB. 


47 


Fig.  17. 


1 .  As  in  the  first  exercise. 

2.  Throw  the  head  and  body  back,  bring  the  legs  up 
under  the  bar  between  the  arms,  the  head  back  far  as 
possible,  so  that  the  face  is  parallel  with  the  ground  (Fig. 
37),  shorten  the  arms  with  an  effort,  pulling  the  body  up, 
so  that  the  scat  is  a  little  over  the  bar ;  hend  the  legs 
backward  over  the  bar  as  much  as  possible,  and  then 
lengthen  the  arms,  brmging  the  body  over  the  bar  into 
an  upright  sitting  position. 

The  above  exercise  Is  not  very  difficult.  When  the 
position,  as  shown  in  Fig.  17,  is  gained,  the  body  is 
drawn   up  so  that   the  centre  of  gravity  is  above   the 

bar ;  when  this  is  gained,  the  bending  of  the  legs  naturally  brings  the 

body  up  to  a  sitting  position. 

19.  To  Extend  the  Legs  from  a  Sitting  Vosition.^r-Position  as  in  first 


Fig.  18. 


exercise. 

1.  Sit  on  the  bar  as  in  last  exercise. 

2.  Grasp  the  bar  with  both  hands,  the  fingers 
and  thumb  meeting,  raise  the  legs  up  slowly  until 
they  are  at  right  angles  with  the  body,  the  arms 
being  straightened  as  rigidly  as  possible,  raising 
and  sustaining  the  entire  body  above  and  over  the 
bar  (Fig.  18). 

20.  To  Lower  the  Body  from  a  Sitting  Posi- 
tion.—Po^i^iow  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Sit  on  the  bar  as  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  Seize  the  bar  with  both  hands,  reversed 
grasp ;  keep  the  legs  close  together,  lower  the 
body  as  far  as  possible,  and  return  again  to  a 
sitting  position  (Fig.  19).  This  requires  consid- 
erable muscular  efifort. 

21.  To  Sit  on  the  Bar  and  Swing  Round 
Backwards.— Po5tYiow  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Sit  on  the  bar  as  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  Grasp  the  bar  with  both  hands  between  the 
legs,  the  fingers  and  thumbs  meeting,  straighten 

the  arms  so  that  they  will  support  the  weight  of  the  body,  swing  the  body 


48 


THE    HO  BIZONTAL     BAR. 


backward  with  a  strong  impetus  (Fig.  20),  keeping  a  firm  hold  of  the  bar  with 
both  hands,  making  a  complete  revolution  round  the  bar  and  returning  to 
an  upright  sitting  position.  As  the  body  swings  around,  the  bar  will  slip 
down  under  the  bent  knees,  the  seat  on  the  bar  being  resumed  at  the  com- 
pletion of  th3  swing. 

Although  similar  to  the  leg  swing,  this  exercise  is  much  more  difficult  to 
execute. 

No  person  can  be  expected  to  succeed  in  this  exer-  ^ig-  ^0. 

cise  upon  a  first  trial,  and  most  of  those  who  attempt 
it  lose  the  momentum  of  the  swing  when  they  get  half     /' 
round   the   bar.    Some  succeed   in    getting    almost  ^f^^.^ 
round,  and,  without  having  sufficient  swing  to  regain  a  ;'^;'' 
balance,  fall  forward  again ;   but  repeated  trial  will 
soon  reward  the  pupil  with  success. 

This  exercise  may  also  be  executed  with  thejbfl[^ds^ 
grasping  the  bar  outside  of  the  legs,  instead  of  between  ' 
them. 

22.  To   Sit  on  the  Bar  and  Swing  Round  For- 
wards.— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Sit  on  the  bar  as  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  Seize  the  bar  with  both  hands,  reversed  grasp ;  straighten  the  arms  so 


that  they  will  support  the  whole  weight  of  the  body 
(see  Fig.  21),  raise  the  body  as  far  upwards  from 
the  bar  as  possible,  throw  the  chest  out,  head  back, 
legs  straight,  hands  firmly  grasping  the  bar,  swing 
the  body  forward  with  as  much  impetus  as  pos- 
sible, keeping  the  arms  straight,  and  make  a  com- 


Fiir.  21. 


Fig.  22. 


plete  turn  forward  around  the  bar. 

This  is  much  more  difficult  than 
the  backward  swing. 

The  remarks  at  the  conclusion  of 
the  last  exercise  also  apply  to  this. 

23.  To  Encircle  the  Bar.   No.  1. — Position  as  in  first  exer- 
cise. 
As  in  first  exercise,  the  fingers  and  thumb  meeting 
Bend  the  arms,   raising  the  body  until  the  chin  rises  above  the  bar 
(Fig.  8),  throw  the  head  back,  the  legs  forward,  and  at  the  same  time  upward 


THE    HORIZONTAL    BAB. 


Fig.   23. 


aided  by  a  simultaneous  effort  of  the  wrist  (see 
Fig.  22).  Wliile  the  legs  are  passing  over  and 
around  the  bar,  straighten  the  arms  and  come  dovm  on 
the  other  side  in  the  position  as  shown  in  Fig.  12. 

This  is  a  difiScult  exercise,  and  will  require  consid- 
erable practice  before  it  can  be  executed  with  success. 

24,  To  Encircle  the  Bar.  No.  2,— Position  as  in 
first  exercise. 

1.  Spring  from  the  ground  and  grasp  the  bar  with 
both  hands,  the  fingers  and  thumbs  meeting,  bend 
the  arms  and  instantly  shoot  the  lower  limbs  and  the 
whole  column  of  the  body  to  the  front,  over  the  bar 
(Fig.  23),  continue  the  circle,  lowering  the  body  by  the 
rear,  quit  the  grasp,  and  descend  yielding. 

25.  The  Short  Swing  or  Circle,  Backwards.— Posi- 
tion as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Rise  above  the  bar  as  in  exercise  twelve,  Fig.  12. 

2.  Rest  the  body  against  the  bar,  at  the  pit  of  the 
stomach,  move  the  legs  to  and  fro,  with  a  gentle  but 
determined  movement,  throw  the  head  back,  the  legs 
forward  and  upward,  this  movement  greatly  assisted 
by  the  wrists  will  (if  properly  done)  give  sufficient 
impetus  to  enable  the  body  to  revolve  around  the  bar 
and  resume  the  original  position  as  shown  in  Fig.  12. 

At  first  the  pupil  may  be  satisfied  with  executing 
one  revolution,  but  a  little  practice  will  enable 
him  to  accomplish  several  in  succession. 

The  beginner  will  find  this  a  rather  dif- 
ficult exercise ;  after  throwing  the  body  back, 
if  he  docs  not  succeed  in  getting  sufficient  im- 
petus, he  will  come  into  a  hanging  position  as 
shown  in  Fig.  22. 

After  some  little  practice  this  exercise 
should  be  effected  without  allowing  the  body 
to  touch  the  bar  at  all  whilst  going  round ;  but 
this  will  be  found  to  be  much  more  difficult, 


6<l 


THE    HORIZONTAL    BAB. 


Fi;r.  25. 


as  the  wrists  will  then  have  to  do  all  the  work  (see  Fig.  24). 

;  26.  The  Short  Swing  or  Circle,  Forwards. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  seventh  exercise.     (In  all  forward  movements  the  hands  must 
be  reversed.) 

2.  Else  above  the  bar  as  in  twelfth  exercise  (Fig.  12),  but  with  the  grasp 
reversed. 

3.  Incline  the  body  forward  so  that  the  knees  will  bo 
pressed  firmly  against  the  bar  (Fig.  25),  throw  the  body  over 
forward,  at  the  same  time  extending  it  straight  out  at  arms' 
length,  and  with  an  effort  of  the  arms  as  the  body  swings 
round  come  up  again  on  the  other  side  of  the  bar  in  an  up- 
right position.    The  arms  must  be  kept  perfectly  straight. 

Like  the  preceding  exercise,  this  is  difficult,  and  requires 
considerable  practice  before  it  can  be  executed  with  ease. 

When  a  single  revolution  has  been  properly  accomplished, 
the  pupil  must  persevere  until  he  can  execute  several  in  suc- 
cession without  pause  between  the  movements. 


Fig.  26. 


27.  To  Hang  by  the  Legs.  No  1, — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise,  hands  a  little  wider  apart. 

2.  As  in  eighteenth  exercise,  to  the  bringing  of  the  legs  up  under  the 
bar  between  the  arms  (Fig.  17). 

3.  Bend  the  knees  over  the  bar  with  a  firm  grip,  at  the 
same  time  let  go  the  hands  (Fig.  26),  and  hang  by  the 
knees,  the  arms  folded  across  the  chest. 

After  having  remained  in  this  position  a  short  time, 
raise  the  body  up,  grasp  the  bar  with  both  hands,  remove 
the  right  leg  from  the  bar  (the  left  leg  still  remaining  over 
the  bar),  carry  the  right  leg  over  the  instep  of  the  left' 
foot,  let  go  the  hands,  and  hang  by  the  left  leg.  Hang  in 
this  manner  alternately  by  the  right  and  the  left  legs. 

This  exercise,  if  constantly  practised,  will  be  found  to 
so  materially  strengthen  the  knee  joint,  that  the  benefit 
derived  from  it  will  be  of  great  advantage  in  climbing. 

28.  To  Hang  by  the  Legs.  No.  2.— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Sit  on  the  bar  as  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  Grasp  the  bar  on  either  side,  fingers  and  thumb  meeting,  gi*adually 


THE    HORIZONTAL    BAB. 


51 


slide  back  over  the  bar,  leaning  the  body  forward  until  the  bar  reaches  the 
bend  of  the  knees,  bend  the  legs  so  as  to  catch  the  bar  with  a  firm  grasp  at 
the  knees,  let  the  body  fall  backward,  and  when  steady  let  go  with  thfi 
hands. 

This  exercise  should  be  practised  on  a  low  bar,  so  that  when  hanging  by 
the  legs,  the  hands  will  touch  the  ground.  It  should  be  practised  until  it 
can  be  executed  in  an  easy  manner,  as  it  is  very  useful  in  shifting  from 
one  exercise  to  another. 


Fig.  27. 


29.  To  Hang  by  the  Legs.  No.  Z.— Position  as 
in  first  exercise. 

3 .  Sit  on  the  bar  as  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  Get  a  steady  balance  on  the  bar,  extend  the 
arms  horizontally  in  front  (Fig.  27-0),  swing  back- 
ward so  as  to  hang  by  the  legs  (&). 

This  feat  requires  great  strength  in  the  legs,  and 
confidence  in  the  performer.  It  should  never  be  at- 
tempted, even  by  a  good  gymnast,  without  the  as- 
sistance of  the  Lungers,  see  page  19. 


30.  To  Swing  by  the  Legs. — Position  as  in  first 
exerdsc. 

1.  Hang  by  the  legs  as  in  the  preceding  exercise, 
keeping  the  feet  well  towards  the  ground. 

2.  Move  the  body  to  and  fro  to  get  into  a  good 
swing,  the  body  being  drawn  up  in  the  forward 
movement,  and  carried  with  the  aims  as  far  back 

as  possible  in  the  backward  swing. 

This  exercise  should  be  practised  until  the  pupil  is  able  to  swing  the 
body  either  backward  or  forward  on  a  level  with  the  bar.  At  first  the  fric- 
tion will  make  the  legs  a  little  sore,  but  they  will  soon  harden  with  practice. 
This  exercise  is  of  great  benefit  to  the  knees  and  legs. 

31.  The  Leg  Swing  Off,  Backward. — Position  as  in  the  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  the  preceding  exercises. 

2.  Proceed  with  the  Leg  Swing  as  in  the  preceding  exercise,  and  when 
sufficiently  high  in  the  backward  swing,  that  is,  with  the  body  in  a  horizon- 
tal position  face  downward,  unhitch  the  legs  and  ahght  on  the  feet  (Fig.  28). 


THE    HORIZONTAL    BAR. 


In  practising  this  exercise  it  is  of  the  great- 
est  importance  to  learn  the  exact  time  to  dis-  ^' 

engage  the  legs  from  the  bar.  The  tyro  is  apt 
to  hold  on  too  long,  not  allowing  sufficient  swing 
to  turn  in  order  to  alight  on  the  feet.  The  first 
object  is  to  swing  high  enough  (Fig.  28),  the 
next  is  to  disengage  the  legs  exactly  as  the  body 

reaches  the  highest  point  on  the  backward  swing  and  before  it  com- 
mences the  return  swing.  If  the  learner  leaves  the  bar  on  the  return  he 
wiU,  as  a  matter  of  course,  fall  on  his  head  or  hands.  If  he  unhitches  his 
legs  before  swinging  back  sufficiently  high,  he  will  land  on  all-fours.  This, 
and  all  similar  exercises,  should  be  practised  with  the  Lungers  until  the 
pupil  acquires  the  knack  of  disengag_  .g  the  legs  at  the  precise  time.  This 
is  not  a  very  difficult  feat. 

32.  The  Half  Fall  Back  and  Swing  OK— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Sit  on  the  bar  as  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  As  in  twenty-ninth  exercise,  but,  instead  of  hanging  by  the  legs, 
swing  up,  as  in  Fig.  28,  and  alight  on  the  feet  as  directed  in  the  preceding 
exercise. 

When  balancing  on  the  bar,  lean  the  body  forward  as  much  as 
possible,  in  order  to  give  it  a  greater  distance  to  swing ;  throw  the  body 
backward  with  as  great  impetus  as  possible,  the  momentum  acquired  by 
this  effort,  if  done  with  sufficient  force,  will  cause  the  body  to  swing  round 
and  rise  up  on  the  other  side,  as  shown  in  Fig.  28. 

In  the  execution  of  this  exercise  the  arms  must  be  freely  employed,  the 
proper  use  of  them  is  all-important  in  giving  the  necessary  impetus  to  the 
body.  The  pupil  must  not  be  nervous  about  throwing  the  body  from  thd 
bar  with  too  great  force,  the  greater  the  force  used  the  better. 

33.  The  Fall  Back,  or  Hock  Swing.— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1 .  Sit  on  the  bar  as  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  As  in  twenty-ninth  exercise  up  to  the  swing  backwards ;  from  this 
point  throw  the  body  back  with  all  the  impetus  and  determination  possible, 
keeping  a  firm  grip  on  the  bar  with  the  knees,  straighten  the  body  before 
it  reaches  the  point  immediately  under  the  bar,  throw  the  arms  back,  the 
chest  out ;  this,  if  properly  done,  should  give  sufficient  momentum  to  swing 
the  body  quite  round  the  bar  into  a  sitting  position  (see  Fig.  29). 


TEE    HORIZONTAL    BAR. 


53 


This  is  similar  to   the  preceding  exercise,  but,  in  making  the  swing 
^.  backward,  much  more  impetus  is 

necessary  in  order  to  get  the  re- 
quired swing  to  make  the  complete 
revolution.      It  is  a  feat  that  re- 
quires confidence  as  well  as   con- 
tinued   practice,    and    the    pupil 
should  be  able  to  execute  the  pre- 
ceding exercise  with    ease    before 
attempting  this  one.     When  well 
done,  however,  this  is  one  of  the 
most  showy  feats  in  gymnastics. 
A  balance  may  be  attained  between  each  revolution,  or  several  turns 
may  be  made,  ''  in  a  swing,"  without  any  pause ;  the  former  is  more  diffi- 
cult. 

34.  To  Pass  Through  the  Anos.— Position  as' in  first  exercise. 

J.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Bring  the  feet  up  between  the  hands  without  touching  the  bar,  pass 


Fig.  30. 


Fig.  31. 


the  feet  through  between  the 
hands  and  drop  them  until 
they  nearly  touch  the  ground 
(Fig.  HO) ;  return  in  the  same 
way.    Repeat  several  times. 

35.  To  Hang  with  the  Arms 
Over  the  Bai,— Position  as  in 
first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  body  up  by  an 
efibrt  of  the  arms  and  chest 
(Fig.  31-a),  let  go  the  hands 
and  thrust  the  arms  over  the 
bar,  so  as  to  remain  suspended 
by  the  upper  arms  (b).  To  re- 
turn raise  the  body,  draw  the 

arms  quickly  back,  catch  the  bar  with  the  hands,  and  drop  to  the  first 
position. 


c1i 


54 


THE    HORIZONTAL    BAB. 


36.  The  Tilt  Upon  the  "Bdix.— Position  Fig.  32. 

as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise,  the  fingers  and 
thumb  meeting. 

2.  SwiDg  forward  (Fig.  32-a),  raise 
the  feet  to  the  bar  keeping  the  legs 
straight  (6),  with  a  strong  effort  of  the 
arms,  aided  by  a  corresponding  motion  of- 
the  legs  raise  the  body  quickly  on  the 
bar  (c). 

In  descending,  set  the  body  free  from 
the  bar,  and  descend  yieldiri; 

37.   The    Arm               Fig.  34. 
Mill. — Position  as 
in  first  exercise.  , . .  -\  \ ^ 

1.  Sit    on   the  '  '     /| 
bar   as  in  eight- 
eenth exercise. 

2.  Straighten 
the  body,  put  the 
arms    straight 

'behind,  shp  gradually  down  until  the  bar 
catches  the  arms  (see  Fig.  33),  hold  the  arms 
firmly  to  the  side,  the  hands  well  distended  on 
the  chest,  the  legs  straight.  Swing  backward 
and  forward  until  sufficient  impetus  is  attained  to 
make  an  entire  revolution  around  the  bar  (Fig. 
34). 

Continue  practising  until  several  revolutions  can  be  performed  without 
pause.  A  showy  feat  when  executed  rapidly.  This  exercise  may  also  be 
executed  with  a  forward  movement. 

38.  The  T  Mill. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Sit  on  the  bar  as  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  As  in  preceding  exercise,  but  instead  of  bringing  the  arms  down 
behind  the  bar,  extend  them  at  the  sides,  grasp  the  bar  a  little  underneath 


THE    HORIZONTAL     BAR. 


56 


with  the  thumb  uppermost  (Fig.  35),  and  in  this  position  revolve  round  the  bar. 


Fig.  35. 


Fig.  37. 


Fiff.  38. 


The  concluding  re- 
marks to  the  preceding 
exercises  apply  also  to 
this. 

39.  The  Back  Mill  — 
Position  as  in  first  exer- 
cise. 

1.  Sit  on  the  bar  n^ 
in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  Reverse  the  grasp 
of  the  hands,  jump  for- 

"^  ward,  support   the  body 

with  the  arms,    middle    of  the  back  close   to    the  bar  (Fig.  36),  in  this 
position  swing  backward  and  revolve  round  the  bar. 

40.  The  Quick  Pull  JS^.— Position 
as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Throw  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  forward  so  as  to  distend  the 
chest,  with  a  strong  efibrt  of  the 
arms  raise  the  body  at  the  same  in- 
stant that  it  receives  the  backward 
impulse  given  to  it  by  throwing  for- 
ward the  chest  and  shoulders 
(Fig.  37).  •  // 

This  feat  consists  in  raising  the     \''l 
body  quickly  from  position  (a)  to 
position    (&)  without  bending  the  arms,  and  without 
the  aid  of  a  swing. 

41.  To  Pass  the  legs  Between  the  Arms — Position 
as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 
2.  Spring  up,  gathering  the  legs  as  much  as  possible,  so  as  to  pass  them 
between  the  arms  without  touching  the  bar   (Fig.  38),  when  the  legs  are 
fairly  over  let  go  the  hands  and  alight  on  the  ground. 

D^purtment  *f  ?hyile«il  B4uc»tlOB 
Uolv  '••'.  vv  of  California 


56 


THE    HORIZONTAL    BAB. 


Outside  the  Aims.— Position  as  in  first  exer- 


Tm.  39. 


42.  To  Jump  Over  the  Bar 

cise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  As  in  preceding  exercise,  except  that 
the  legs  are  spread  so  as  to  pass  over  the 
bar  on  each  side  of  the  arms  instead  of 
between  them  (Fig.  39). 

43.  To  Swing  up  to  the  Bar  Without 
Bending  the  Anns. — Position  as  in  first 
exercise. 

1 .  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Swing  forward  as  in  Fig.  40  (a),  and 
with   the    assistance   of  the   momentum 
gained  by  the  return  swing,  aided 
by  a  strong  effort  of  the  wrists,  rise 
up  to  the  bar  without  bending  the 
arms  (&). 

44-  The  Upstart. — Position  as 
in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Swing  the  feet  up  to  the 
bar,  as  in  Fig.  4],  at  the  same 
time  raising  the  body  by  bend- 
ing the  arms ;  shoot  out  the  feet 
with  a  quick  movement  as  far  as 
possible,  bring  them  down  again 
with  a  snap,  so  that  they  de- 
scribe a  semicircle,  and  as  the  body  rises  from  the  impetus 
of  this  movement  assisted  by  the  wrists,  straighten  the 
arms  and  rise  erect  above  the  bar,  as  in  Fig.  ]2. 

This  showy  exercise  afi'ords  the  gymnast  a  means  of 
rising  above  the  bar  with  a  quick  movement,  something 
like  a  start,  or  snap. 

45.  The  Jerk  Up. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Draw  the  legs  up,  keeping  the  arms  straight   (Fig. 


THE    HORIZONTAL    BAB. 


57 


42);  throw  the  head  back  a  little,  jerk  or  carry  the  legs  down  suddenly, 
Fig.  42.  the  feet    describing    a    semicircle,    and    by    the 

strength    of   the    wrists,    without    bending    the 
arms,  assisted  by  the  momentum  or  send  given  to 


¥ 


the  body  by  the  sudden  motion  of  tho  legs,  rise 
erect  above  the  bar  as  in  Fig.  12. 

This  is  somewhat  like  the  preceding  exercise, 
and  is  intended  to  accomplish  the  same  purpose, 
executed  without  a  swing  and  without  bending  the  arms. 

46.  The  Back  Horizontal — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Pass  through  the  arms  as  in  exercise  thirty-four  (Fig.  30),  but  on  car- 
rying the  legs  through  raise  them  up 
straight  with  the  body,  then,  keeping  them 
in  that  position,  lower  them  until  they  are 
horizontal  with  the  body,  as  shown  in  Fig. 
43.  Remain  in  this  position  a  short  time. 
Return  through  the  arms. 

47.  The  Front  Horizontal. — Position  as 
in  first  exercise. 
with  the  grasp  of  the  hands  reversed. 
tjie  bar,  lower  them  slowly  into  a  horizontal  lino 
with  the  body  (Fig.  44);  remain  in  that 
position  as  long  as  possible  without  strain- 
ing. 

If  properly  done,  this  is  one  of  the  most 
difficult  of  all  the  exercises. 


J.  As  in  first  e 
2.  Raise  the  legs 

Pig.  44. 


48.  Skinning  the  C2A..— Position  as  in 
first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  twenty-seventh  exercise. 

2.  Swing,  and  when  the  legs  are  ex- 
tended forward  as  in  Fig.  45,  pass  them 
rapiSiythfaugh  the  arms  (6),  and  over  the 

bar  (c).    IJ^om  this  position  the  gymnast  may^sit  on  the  bar  and  proceed 
with  othet"  exercises. 

49.  The  Giant  Swing  Forward.— Post^'ow  as  in  first  exercise. 


58 


THE    HORIZONTAL    BAB. 


1.  Rise  above  the  bar  as  in  twelfth  exercise  (Fig.  12).    Grasp  the  bar 
firmly,  the  fingers  and  thumbs  together.  Fig.  45. 

2.  Move  the  legs  backwards  and  for- 
wards a  few  times,  leaning  the  body  for- 
ward a  little  with  the  same  motion  of  the 
le<?s,  fling  the  body  upward  and  backwards 
at   arms'    length  off  the  bar  (Fig.  46-a 
without   losing    the    momentum    of   the 
swing;  in  descending  slightly  bend  the  body 
backward,    when 
the  body  is  under 
the  bar,  throw  the 
legs  suddenly  for- 
ward and  the  head 
back  (this  move- 
ment will  give  an 
upward   impetus); 
while      going    up 
draw  the   body   a 
little   closer    by 

bending  the  arms  (this  shortens  the 
and  greatly  assists  the  momentum  already  gained),  come  up  over  the  bar 
with  the  arms  still  bent  and  chest  thrown  forward ;  at  this  point  the  gym- 
nast will  find  that  the  hands  are  rather  too  far  over  the  bar,  the  arms  being 
bent,  and  the  body  nearly  perpendicular.  This  is  what  may  be  called  the 
^'dcad  point"  of  the  swing,  and  is  a  very  awkward  posture  to  be  in  ;  but 
the  secret  of  getting  out  of  it,  and  regaining  the  full  force  of  the  swing  is 
what  is  called  "  the  shift,"  wljich  is,  to  give  the  hands  a  sudden  turn,  and 
bring  the  palms  on  to  the  top  of  the  bar,  which  gives  power  to  straighten 
the  arms  again  and  start  for  another  revolution.  With  practice  the  pupil 
will  be  able  to  get  the  necessary  impetus  without  bending  the  arms  {h). 
This  is  one  of  the  most  difficult  feats  in  gymnastics  and  requires  great 
strength,  energy  and  nerve.  Before  attempting  it  the  pupil  should  be  able 
to  execute  the  ^'  short  swing  "  with  ease. 

60.   The  Giant  Swing  Backward. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 
1.  Rise  above  the  bar  as  in  twelfth  exercise  (Fig.   12),   seize  the  bar 
firmly  with  the  reversed  grasp. 


bar 


THE     HORIZONTAL     BAB. 


I 


2.  Incline  forward  so  as  to  balance  the  body  in  a  horizontal  position,  arms 
bent,  body  resting  on  the  elbows,  gradually  raise   the  body  to  a  vertical 
Fifr.47.  position    over    the     bar,     arms    still    bent 

(Fig.  47),  at  the  moment  the  body  begins 
to  fall  over  the  bar  straighten  the  arms  quickly 
as  in  Fig.  48,  and  this  movement  will  impart 
sufficient  impetus  to  swing  the  body  com- 
pletely round  the  bar.  When  the  revolution 
'has  been  nearly  completed  as  the  body  is 
/  "*-\  "WV':^^  again  rising  to  the  vertical  position  shift  the 
/  *  ^^""*^2i^a^^  hands  round  a  little,  bend  the  arms  as  in  Fig. 

j  r"^^^l^     \\         ^^'  ready  for  a  second  revolution. 

i  ^^^<^^&?         ^^'   -^^^^  Backaway. — Position  as  in  first 

*'"  Ji(sRC^     exercise. 

1.    Swing  as  directed  in  the  '^  Long  Swing 
Forward"  (Exercise  Forty-uinth),  fand  as  soon  as  the  body  is  horizontal 
Fig.  48.  \,         with  the  bars,  that  is,  a  little  lower  than 

the  position  shown  in  (6)  Fig.  40,  and 
rather  above  the  horizontal,  let  go 
the  hold  of  the  hands,  and  ahght  on  the 
feet  (Fig.  49). 

This  graceful  feat  makes  a  brilliant 
finish  to  the  preceding  exercise;  it  is  not 
very  difficult,  but  demands  great  con- 
fidence and  care  when  practising  it. 
The  gymnast  should  not  attempt  to 
execute  it  without  the  assistance  of 
the  Lungers  (see  page  19).  When 
practising  the  Fig.  49. 

Backaway  the 
p  r  i  n  cipal 
thing  is  to  get  i 
a  good  swing,  but  not  too  much  or  the  feet  may 
catch  against  the  bar ;  experience  will  teach  just 
how  much  is  necessary.  It  will  be  observed  that 
when  the  hands  are  released  the  body  seems  to  turn  a  complete  somer- 
sault. 


60 


THE    HORIZONTAL    BAB. 


52.  The  Roll  Off. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Sit  on  the  bar  as  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  Balance  the  body  perfectly  straight,  bring 
the  arms  up  over  the  head,  drop  the  body  back- 
ward (Fig.  50),  this  movement  gives  suffi- 
cient impetus  to  cause  the  body  to  execute  a 
sort  of  a  backward  somersault,  and  the  gymnast 
to  alight  in  safety  on  his  feet. 

Like  the  preceding  exercise  this  pretty  feat 
requires  confidence,  and  should  not  be  practised  without/the  Lungers.  It 
is  not  difficult,  and  when  once  acquired  the  gymnast  is  astonished  at  its 
simplicity.  The  Koll  Off  serves  as  a  graceful  finish  for  many  of  the  bar 
exercises. 

These  fifty- two  exercises  cover  all  the  principal  evolutions  on  the  Hori- 
zontal Bar ;  and,  when  fully  mastered,  the  student  may  consider  himself  a 
proficient  in  this  branch  of  gymnastic  exercises. 

Some  of  the  feats  involve  severe  strain  on  the  muscles,  especially  of  the 
arms,  but  constant  practice  will  enable  the  learner  to  reduce  the  strain  in  a 
great  degree,  by  discovering  the  exact  point  at  which  the  greatest  exertion 
is  needed,  and  thus  concentrate  his  energies  at  the  proper  time. 

The  concluding  remarks  on  page  8  are  especially  applicable  to  the  Hori- 
zontal Bar  exercises,  in  which  will-power  will  be  found,  not  to  replace 
muscular  effort,  but  to  so  aid  and  regulate  it  as  to  lessen  very  greatly  the 
severity  of  the  strain  requisite  to  success. 


TAULTI]^G   OVER  THE  HORIZONTAI.  BAR 


The  beginner  should  practise  upon  different  heights  gradually  ;  begin- 
ning by  placing  the  bar  as  low  as  the  pit  of  the  stomach,  and  not  increasing 
the  height  until  able  to  clear  it  with  ense,  and  then  only  raising  the  bar  two 
Fig.  1.      inches  at  a  time  until  able  to  vault  over  it  at  the  proper  height. 
1.  To  Vault  Over  the  Bar  in  Three  Movemejits.— Position  of 
attention,  facing  the  bar,  close  to  it. 

] .  Kaise  the  hands  and  grasp  the  bar ;  the  hands  at  the 
distance,  (see  Technical  Terms)  the  fingers  and  thumbs  meet- 
ing; lift  the  feet  from  the  ground,  press  strongly  with  the 
haniJj&j^ising  to  the  full  extension  of  the  arms  and  inclining  the 
ody  slightly  forward  during  its  ascent;  the  head  erect,  the 
column  of  the  body  upright,  the  legs  straight  and  together,  the 
feet  together,  the  toes  pointed  to  the  ground  (Fig.  1). 

Raise  the  left  leg,  retaining  its  extension,  and  place  the 
foot  upon  the  bar,  the  hollow  of  the  foot  resting  on  it  (Fig.  2). 
3.  Raise  the  right  leg,  and  bring  the  right  foot  up  to  the 
left,  clear  the  bar,  the  whole  column  of  the 
body  and  the  lower  limbs  in  one  horizontal  line 
over  it,  the  arms  bent,  the  chest  turned  towards 
the  bar  (Fig.  3),  quit  the  grasp,  and  descend  yield- 
ing, facing  the  bar  opposite  the  point  grasped  by 
the  hands. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  right. 

2.  To  Vault  Over  the  Bar  in  Two  Movements  — 
Position    as    in  Fig.  3. 

first  exercise. 
1.  As  in  first 


exercise. 
2.   Lean 


for- 


ward across  the  bar,  press  the  lower  limbs  to  the  front  under  the  bar 
and  as  they  return  to  the  rear  throw  them  to  the  left,  clear ^he  bar,  as  in 


61 


62 


VAULTINa     OVEB    THE    HORIZONTAL    BAB. 


preceding  exercise  (Fig.  3),  quit  the  grasp  ofthehandS;  and  descend  yield- 
ing, facing  the  bar. 

3.  To  Vault  Over  the  Bar  in  One  Movement. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 
1 .  Raise  both  hands  and  grasp  the  bar  as  in  first  exercise,  press  from 

both  hands  and  feet  simultaneously,  throw  both  feet  with  the  lower  limbs 
in  position  to  the  left,  clear  the  bar,  the  trunk  and  lower  limbs  in  the  posi- 
tion of  first  exercise  (Fig.3),  quit  the  grasp,  and  descend  yieldiDg. 

During  this  exercise  the  body  should  make  a  complete  turn,  the  feet 
describing  a  semicircle  diagonally,  the  chest  at  each  point  of  the  ascent  and 
descent  being  continually  turned  towards  the  bar,  the  position  of  the  body  on 
the  completion  of  the  descent  being  as  distinctly  facing  the  bar  as  it  was 
preparatory  to  the  ascent. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  right.  Fig.  4.  Fig.  5. 

4.  To  Vault  Over  the  Bar  by  the  Back 

Xift. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Raise  both  hands  and  grasp  the  bar, 
as  in  first  exercise;  press  strongly  with 
the  hands  and  feet  simultaneously,  and 
throw  the  body  over  the  bar  in  a  straight 
line  vertically  above  the  head,  the  arms 
bending  during  its  ascent,  the  elbows  held 
close  in  by  the  sides,  the  head  and 
shoulders  inclined  to  the  front,  the  column 
of  the  body  and  the  lower  limbs  with  the 
toes  pointed  upward  in  a  vertical  line 
when  above  the  bar  (Fig.  4) ;  from  this 
point  throw  the  feet  to  the  front,  bending 
the  back  inwards,  and  raising  the  head  as 
the  feet  approach  the  ground,  quit  the 
grasp  (Fig.  5),  and  descend  yielding,  the 
back  to  the  bar. 

5.  To  Vault  Over  the  Bar  by  the  Back  Lift  in  Two  Movements.— Posi- 
tion as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise  (Fig.  1) 

2.  Press  the  lower  limbs  to  the  front,  as  in  second  exercise,  and  as  they 
return  to  the  rear,  throw  them  straight  above  the  head  as  in  fourth  exer- 


VAULTING    OVER    THE    HORIZONTAL    BAB. 


63 


<5ise  (Fig.  4 ,  the  arms  bending  during  the  ascent  -,  clear  the  bar  and  de- 
iscend  as  in  fourth  exercise. 


Fig.  6. 


6.    To  Vault  the  Bar   Over   One   Hand.— 

Fosition  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  fourth  exercise,  but  during  the  ele- 
vation of  the  lower  limbs  above  the  bar,  instead 
^f  retaining  the  body  between  the  hands,  incline 
it  over  the  right  arm,  the  trunk  and  lower  limbs 
turning  towards  the  right ;  complete  the  eleva- 
tion of  the  lower  limbs  until  they  rise  straight 
above  the  bar  over  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand, 
quit  the  grasp  of  the  left,  and  pass  it  above  the 
head;  let  the  feet  descend  (Fig.  6),  the  right  side 
next  the  bar,  quit  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand, 
and  descend  yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  over  the  left 
hand. 

"  7.  To  Vault  the  Bar  with  the  Hands  Ordy.— Position  as  in  first 
■exercise. 

1.  Spring  up  and  grasp  the  bar  with  both  hands,  as  in  first  exercise, 
and  in  lifting  the  feet  from  the  ground,  press  them  to  the  front  under  the 
bar ;  on  their  return  oscillation,  rapidly  bend  the  arms,  until  the  breast 
rises  above  the  bar,  press  strongly  with  the  hands,  continue  the  upward 
movement  of  the  body,  and  at  the  same  time  throw  the  lower  limbs  in 
position  to  the  right,  clear  the  bar,  and  descend  yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  left. 

8.  To  Vault  the  Bar  with  the  Hands  Only,  by  the  Back  JAR,.— Position 
as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  preceding  exercise  until  the  breast  rises  above  the  bar,  at  this 
point  press  the  elbows  close  in  by  the  sides,  incline  the  head  and  shoulders 
to  the  front,  elevate  the  lower  limbs  vertically  above  the  head  as  in  fourth 
exercise  (Fig.  4),  and  descend  yielding  (Fig.  5). 

9.  To  Vault  the  Bar  with  Hands  Only,  Over  One  'Ka.ndi.— Position  as 
in  first  exercise. 

1.    As  in  preceding  exercise,  but  during  the  elevation  of  the  lower  limbs 


64 


VAULTING    OVER     THE    HORIZONTAL    BAR. 


above  the  bar,  incline  the  body  over  the  right  arm,  complete  the  elevatiott. 
of  the  lower  limbs,  and  the  descent  as  in  sixth  exercise  (Fig.  6). 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  over  the  left  hand. 

10.   To  Vault  the  Bar  with  One  Hand.--  Fig.  7. 

JPosition  of  attention  facing  the  line  of  the  bar, 
the  bar  on  the  left. 

1.  Grasp  the  bar  strongly  with  the  left  hand, 
slightly  bend  the  lower  limbs,  and  on  their  re- 
turn extension,  spring  from  the  ground,  incline 
the  body  strongly  over  the  right  arm,  rapidly 
elevate  the  left  hand  above  the  head,  and  pass 
the  lower  limbs,  straight  and  together,  over  the 
bar  (Fig.  7),  quit  the  grasp,  and  descend  yielding,  facing  the  bar. 

These  vaulting  exercises  are  mainly  the  application  to  the  Horizonft;al 
Bar  of  some  of  the  similar  movements  with  the  Vaulting  Horse,  previo/iisly 
described,  and  may  profitably  be  practised  at  the  same  time,  as  th^  all 
imite  agihty  with  precision  and  nerve. 


THE    PA.EALLEL     BAES. 


The  exercises  upon  the  Parallel  Bars  are  all  virtually  executed  by  the 
trunk  and  upper  limbs,  and  all  of  them  tend  to  strengthen  and  develop  the 
chest;  muscles  of  the  back,  arms,  shoulders  and  abdomen.  This  apparatus 
is  not,  however,  so  popular  as  the  Horizontal  Bar,  as  the  free  use  of  the  legs 
enables  the  gymnast  to  perform  a  greater  number  of  exercises  upon  the 
latter.  Again,  upon  the  single  bar,  the  performer  can  change  from  one  ex- 
ercise to  another,  executing  an  infinite  variety  of  combinations  without  leav- 
ing the  bar  or  touching  the  ground  with  the  feet.  On  the  other  hand,  there 
is  no  single  exercise  on  the  parallel  bars  which  requires  violent  or  sudden 
effort,  and  the  exercises  are  not  only  numerous,  but  capable  of  much  artistic 
effect,  and  requiring  equally  muscular  power  and  dexterity  of  action. 

The  Parallel  Bars  should  be  about  8  feet  long,  19  inches  apart  inside,  4 
feet  8  inches  from  the  ground  or  floor,  2i  inches  wide,  and  3  inches  deep, 

the  upper  surface  rounded  off 
^^  to  fit  the  hands.  The  height  of 

the  bars  from  the  ground  should 
be  regulated  according  to  the 
height  of  those  for  whose  use 
they  are  intended.  The  above 
will  be  suitable  for  the  average 
height. 

1.  The  Single  March  For- 
wards.— Position  of  attention 
at  the  entrance  to  the  bars. 

1.  Raise  the  hands  and 
place  them  on  the  bars,  the 
thumbs  inside,  the  fingers  out- 
side, extendi,  and  pointed  downwards  ;  press  from  the  hands  until  the 
arms  are  completely  extended,  the  head  upright,  the  eyes  directed  to  the 
front,  the  chest  advanced,  the  shoulders  square  to  the  front,  the  column  of 

65 


THE    PARALLEL    BARS. 


Mg.  2. 


the  body   upright  and  firm,  the  lower  limbs  straight  and  together,  the- 
feet  together  and  pointed  to  the  ground  (Fig.  1). 

2.  Rest  on  the  left  hand,  advance  the  right 
six  inches  beyond  it  along  the  bar,  advance  the 
left  six  inches  beyond  the  right  (Fig  2;.  Repeat. 
When  this  can  be  done  with  ease  vary  the  exer 
else  by  turning  the  arms  so  as  to  walk  with  the 
fingers  on  the  inside  of  the  bars.     Repeat. 

Every  exercise  is  here  given  in  its  perfect  form, 
but  with  beginners  of  ordinary  physical  capacity, 
they  may  and  should  be  approached  through 
several  stages  of  less  difiaculty.  Thus,  in  those 
from  number  one  to  number  twelve,  inclusive, 
the  perfectly  upright  position  of  body,  advanced 
breast,  straight  hmbs,  and  erect  head,  may  be 
departed  from  in  the  earher  stages  of  practice.        ^ 

free  lateral  incUnation  from  hand  to  hand ;  and,  in  the  front  and 


Also,  a 

rear  exercises,  with  both  hands  at  once,  a  more  energetic  upright  lift  of 

lower  limbs  may  be  allowed. 

2.  The  Single  March  Backwards. 

— Position  of  attention,  the  back  to 

the  bars. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise  (Fig.  3). 

2.  Rest  on  the  left  hand  and  ad- 
vance the  right  backwards,  the  left 
following  on  the  left,  as  in  first  exer- 
cise. Repeat. 

3.  The  Double  March,  or  Hop 
Forwards. — Position  as  in  first  exer- 
cise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise,  except  that 
the  lower  limbs  are  bent  at  the  knee 
at  a  right  angle  with  the  body,  the 
toes  pk)inted  to  the  rear  (Fig.  4). 

2.  Spring  or  hop  forward  with  both  hands,  the  distance 
in  first  exercise,  retaining  the  body  and  lower  limbs  in 


of  'the 
position. 


THE    PARALLEL    BARS. 


67 


hop  may  be  done  by  bending  the  arms  a  httle,  thereby  sinking  the  shoulders, 

and  straightening  them  again  suddenly,   or  by  raising  the  legs  a  httle, 

Fig.  5.  and  dropping  or  jerking  them  down  again  directly. 

In  either  case  it  must  be  done  so  very  slightly  as  to 

be  scarcely  preceptible.    Repeat. 

4.  The  Double  March,  or  Hop  Backwards.— Post- 

»!■         >,  tion  as  in  second  exercise. 

Ill         \  1.  As  in  third  exercise  (Fig.  4). 

\  2.  Spring  backwards  with  both  hands  the  dis- 

"T     ^    I  11 •  tance  of  the  step  in  first  exei'cise,  retaining  the  body 

\^r   1^  and  lower  hmbs  in  position  (Fig.  5). 

5.  To  Rise  and  Sink  Between  the  Bars,— Po5i- 
tion  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in    first    exercise,  Fig.  6. 
head  a  little  advanced. 

2.  Lower  the  body  as 
much  as  possible  by  an  cfibrt  of  the  arms,  raise 
it  again  by  a  similar  efibrt  (Fig.  6). 

Repeat  the    movement     several     times,  both 
slowly  and  quickly.    The  exercise  may  be  varied 
by    marching    forwards 


and  backwards  as  in  ex- 
ercises one  and  two. 

6.  The  Stooping  Hop. 
— Position  as  in  first 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  As  in  preceding  exercise. 

3.  Spring  or  hop  forward  the  distance  of  the 
step  in  first  exercise,  the  body  nust  not  be 
raised  high  enough  to  permit  thi  arms  being 
straightened  (Fig.  7).    The  legs  she  iild  be  kept 

"'  perfectly  straight,  but  the  pupil  Vnay  depart 
from  this  rlgifl  rule  in  the  earlier  stages  of  practice,  and  to  bssist  in  ex- 
ecuting the  e:^lse  may  draw  the  legs  up  a  very  little,  an^  jerk  them 
down  again  at  the  time  the  hop  is  made. 


This  must,  howev^,   be   dis- 


68 


TEE    PARALLEL    BARS. 


continued  as  soon  as  possible,  as  the  spring  ought  to  be  made  from 
the  wrist  and  arms  without  any  other  assistance.  This  movement  is  also 
called  "  The  Grasshopper/' 

When  this  can  be  executed  with  ease^  vary  the  exercise  by  performing  it 
backwards. 

7.  The  Smu^i^Position  as  in  first       _  Mg.  8. 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Keep  the  arms,  body,  and  legs 
perfectly  straight,  swing  the  legs  and 
body  forward  and  backward  suffi- 
ciently high  to  form  a  right  angle  with 
the  arms  (Fig.  8). 

The  pupil  must  not  attempt  to 
swing  too  high  at  first,  but  gradually  increase  the  height  by  continued 
practice,  and  in  doing  this,  the  legs  must  be  made  ^o  do  their  utmost, 
especially  in  the  forward  swing,  when  they  should  be  ;  brought  up  well  in 
front,  then  carried  down  and  -p.     gj 

up  behind  with  increased  im-  .  — -^^^  1 

petus,  describing  a  semicircle.      /'*    .-"\^  f 

In  either  the  forward  or  back- 
ward swing  the  feet  must  be 
carried  as  high  as  the  head, 
and  if  higher,  so  much  the 
better. 

When  the  exercise  can  be 
executed  with  freedom,  the 
legs  may  be  opened  and  struck 
together  (Fig.  9). 

8.  The  Stooping  Swing.— PosiYiow  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  As  in  fifth  exercise. 

3.  Swing  as  high  and  as  long  as  convenient,  without  fatigue  (Fig.  J  3). 
This  should  not  be  attempted  until  all  the  precediijg  exercises  can  be 

executed  with  ease. 


/ 


9-  The  Swing  March  and  Jump. — As  in  first  exercise. 
1.  As  in  first  exercise. 


THE    PARALLEL    BARS. 


69 


i 


2.  First. — Swing  high  as  in  the  seventh  exercise,  and  when  the  legs  are 
rising  in  the  forward  swing,  advance,  first  the  right  arm,   then  the  left. 

These  movements 
must  be  made  in  the 
forward  swing  only. 

Second. — Swing  and 
advance  each  arm  al- 
ternately, in  the  back- 
ward swing  only. 

Third.  —  Advance 
the  arms  alternately 
one  in  the  forward^ 
and  one  in  the  back- 
ward swing, 
arms  at  once,  as  in  the  third  exercise,  in  the 
forward  swing  only 
(Fig.  11). 

Fiftli.  —  Advance 
both  arms  at  once,  in 
the  backward  swing 
only. 

Sixth.  —  Advance 
both  arms  in  the  for- 
ward and  backward 
swing. 

10.  The  Stooping 
orGrasshopper 
Spring  Forward.— 
Position  as  in  first 
exercise. 

\.  As  in  first  ex- 
ercise. 

2.  Swing  as  in 
the  seventh  exer- 
cise, and  in  the 
backward  swing 
(Fig.  12-a),    bend  the  ariis,  thereby  sinking  the  body  before  the  logs  have 


70 


THE    PARALLEL    BARS. 


had  time  to  drop,  while  the  body  is  rising  in  ih^  forward  swing  (&),  carry  up 
the  legs  well  in  front,  and  at  the  same  time,  with  the  aid  of  the  swing  and  a 
sudden  impulse  given  with  the  arms,  leap  forward  as  far  as  possible  on  the 
hands;  on  alighting  on  the  bars,  straighten  the  arms  as  in  (Fig  11),  and 
proceed  with  the  backward  swing  before  allowing  the  body  to  sink  again. 
Care  must  be  taken  to  preserve  the  balance  of  the  body.  In  the  early 
stages  of  practising,  the  learner  should  only  leap  short  steps,  increasing  the 
length  gradually  until  able  to  go  the  length  of  the  bars  in  three  springs. 

This  is  a  difficult  exercise  to  execute  well,  and  requires  great  strength 
in  the  wrists,  arms  and  shoulders,  as  well  as  resolution  and  constant 
practice. 

11.  The  Grasshopper  Spring  Backward. — Position  as  in  second  exercise. 

1.  As  in  second  exercise. 

2.  As  in  the  preceding  exercise,  but  reversing  the  movements,  dnk  the 
body  in  the /oret^ar^  swing,  and  on  rising  in  the  backward  swing,  spring 
backward,  ahghting  on  the  bars  with  straightened  arms,  sink  again  and 
continue  the  exercise. 
This  is  more  difficult 
than  the  preceding. 

12.  To  Rest  and  Swing 
Porward. — Position  as 
in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Rest  on  the  bars  with  the  arms  (Fig. 
10),  and  with  the  aid  of  a  swing  for- 
ward;  raise  the  body  on  the  hands  at 
arms'  length;  then,  as  the  body  drops 
in  the  return  swing  backward,  catch  the 
bars  under  the  arms  again,  and  so  on  al- 
ternately. The  exercise  may  be  varied  by 
raising  the  body  at  the  backward  swing. 

13.  To  Raise  the   Body  Vertical'.y.—   i^"^ 
Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1 .  As  in  first  exercise.  •. 

2.  Bend  the  upper  part  of  the  body  for-      \ 
ward,  the  whole  weight  being  on  the  wrists  (Fig 


Fijr.  14. 


/rc: 


raise  the  legs  up 


-J. 


PARALLEL    BARS. 


71 


slowly  to  position,  i^main  a  few  seconds,  aod  then  return  as  slowly  as 
possible  to  first  positibn.  It  would  be  much  less  difficult  to  swing  up  to  the 
same  position,  but  tnat  would  not  exercise  the  muscles  in  the  same  degree. 

14.  The  Hand  Balance.— Posiiiow  as 
in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Swing  from  position  [a),  to  position 
(ft),  head  well  back  on  the  neck,  to  pre- 
vent the  body  going  over  too  far  (Fig.  15). 

In  the  earher  stages  of  practising  the 
learner  may  bend  the  aims  a  little  when 
the  legs  are  rising  above  the  head,  this 
will  assist  in  preserving  the  balance,  and 
the  arms  can  be  straightened  afterwards. 
This  modification  must,  however,  be 
gradually  relinquished  and  the  exercise 
executed  without  bending  the  arms  at  all. 
This  exercise  may  be  continued,  with  a  forward  march  each  time  that 

the  body  is  in  a  vertical  position. 

15.  The  Hand-Spring  from  the  Bars. 
— Position  as  in  second  exercise. 

1.  Swing  up  in  a  vertical  position  (Fig. 
16),  and  when  the  body  is  well  over 
(almost  half-way  to  the  ground)  sprmg 
with  the  hands  from  the  bars,  and  alight 
on  the  feet.  This  exercise  is  much 
easier  to  execute  with  the  arms  bent  a 
little.  When  practising  this  or  the  pre- 
ceding exercise,  a  mattrass  and  two  as- 
sistants will  serve  to  guard  against  any 
accident  in  a  first  attempt.  This  showy 
feat  makes  a  good  finish,  when  the 
gymnast  reaches  the  ends  of  the  bars, 
after  executing  such  forward  exercises 
as  the  ninth  and  tenth. 

16.  The  Shoulder  T\Mn..—Tosition  as 
in  first  exercise. 


72 


T'HE    PARALLEL    BARS. 


w 

Fife. 


let  tlie 


1.  Grasp  the  ends  of  the  bars,  sprmg  up  and  rest  the  shoulders  on  them 
(Fig.  17-a),  raise  the  body  slowly  to 
the  vertical  position  (&),  drop  the 
body  slowly  to  the  horizontal  position 
(c),  remain  a  few  seconds  and  return 
slowly  to  the  first  position. 

17.  To  Drop  the  Body  Between  the 
Bars. — Position  of  attention  between  the 
bars  at  the  centre. 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Swing  to  the  rear,  and  when  the 
lower  limbs  are  horizontally  above  the, 
bars,  separate  them  and  let  them  fall  to 

rest  on  the  bars,   extending  the  arms  well  forward  (:^ig.  18-a), 
body  drop  slowly  between  the  bars,  be-  —  - 

ing  supported  by  the  hands  and  feet 
only,  into  position  (6),  return  to  posi- 
tion {a)  without  bending  the  arms  or 
legs,  by  pushing  the  arms  forward  and 
the  legs  backward,  so  as  to  straighten 
the  body.    A  difficult  exercise. 

18.  La  Planche.— Position  as  in  pre- 
ceding exercise. 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Lean  gradually  forward,  bending  the  arms  a  little 
same  time  raising  the  body  and  legs  F%. 
slowly  in  a  horizontal  position  (Fig.  19). 
Remain  a  short  time  and  return  to  first 
position. 

The  object  of  this  exercise  (which  is 
a  very  difficult  one)  is  to  lean  the  upper 
part  of  the  body  sufficiently  forward  to 

counterbalance  the  lower  part  when  raised.    It  require^  great  strength  of 
muscle. 


at  the  elbow,  at  the 
19. 


The  following  series  of  exercises  upca  the  parallel  bars  are  arranged  pro- 


THE    PARALLEL    BARS. 


73 


gressively,  and  havelthe  advantage  of  not  being  as  difficult  as  many  of 
those  preceding  the^ 

19.  To  Clear  the  Bar  by  the  Front— -PostYiow 
of  attention  between  the  bars  at  the  centre. 

1.  Eaise  the  hands  and  place  them  on  the 
bars  opposite  each  other,  the  thumbs  inside,  the 
fingers  outside,  extended  and  pointed  down- 
wards.   Press  from  the  hands  until  the  arms  are 

^^:a  completely  extended,  the  legs  together  and 
straight,  the  toes  pointed  to  the  ground,  the 
head  erect,  the  trunk  of  the  body  upright,  the 
chest  advanced,  the  shoulders  square  to  the 
front  (Fig.  2U). 

2.  Swing  the  lower  limbs,  the  toes  pointed  to 
the  front,  until  they  rise  above  the  level  of  the 

5S  them  over  the  right  bar  (Fig.  21) ;  when  clear  of  the  bar, 
tension  of  the  limbs,  press  strongly  from  the  left  hand,  spring 
to  the  ground,  and  descend  yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  clearing  the  left 
bar. 

In  this,  as  well  as  any  of  the  following  exer- 
cises, the  pupil  must  be  careful  never  to  separate 
the  legs,  they  must  be  kept  rigidly  in  position. 

20.  To  Clear  the  Bar  by  the  Beai- Position 
as  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Swing  the  lower  limbs  to  the  front,  as  in 
preceding  exercise,  and  on  their  return  oscilla- 

le  rear  incline  the  head  and  shoulders  to  the  front,  bending  the 
arms,  and  elevate  the  lower  hmbs,  the 
toes  pointed  to  the  rear,  until  they  rise 
above  the  level  of  the  bars,  and  pass  them 
over  the  right  bar;  (at  this  point  the  lower 
limbs,  trunk  and  head,  are  in  the  hori- 
zontal line  of  the  bars.  Fig.  22),  press 
strongly  from  the  left  hand,  clear  the  right 
bar,  spiing  to  the  ground,  and  descend  yielding,  facing  the  bars. 


74 


THE    PARALLEL    BARS. 


This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  clearing  the  left  bar.  ; 

21.  To  Rest  on  the  Left  Bar  and  Clear  the  Right,  by  the  Front.— 


F  g.  23. 


Fig.  ^. 


Position  as  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Swing  the  lower  limbs  to  the  from  until 
they  rise  above  the  level  of  the  bars,  pass  them 
over  and  let  them  rest  on  the  left  bar,  relaxing 
the  extension  (Fig.  23). 

3.  Press  strongly  with  the  hands,  elevate  the 
lower  limbs  above  the  bar,  sweep  them  across 
and  clear  both  bars  to  the  right  front  (Fig.  24), 
and  descend  yielding,  facing  the  line  of  the  bars. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  resting  on  the 
right  bar,  and  clearing  the  left. 

22.  To  Rest  on  the  Left  Bar  and  Clear  the  Right,  b^  the  Rear.- 

Position  as  in  nineteenth  exercise.  \ 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Slowly  incline  the  head  and  shoulders  to 
the  front,  bending  the  arms ;  swing  the  lower 
limbs,  the  toes  pointed  to  the  rear,  until  they 
rise  above  the  level  of  the  bars,  as  in  Fig.  22;  at 
this  point  pass  them  over  and  let  them  rest  on 
the  left  bar,  relaxing  the  extension,  the  feet  to- 
gether, the  toes  pointed  downwards,  as  in  Fig. 
35. 

3.  Incline  the  head  and  shoulders  to  the 
front,  bend  the  arms  until  the  shoulders  are  as 
low  as  the  bars,  and  at  the  same  time  elevate  the  lower  limbs,  sweep  them 
across  both  bars  to  the  left  rear,  and  descend  yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  resting  on  the  right  bar  and  clearing  the 
left. 

23.  To  Rest  on  The  Right  Bar  in   Front  and  Clear  it  by  the  Rear.— 

Position  as  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

1 .  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Swing  the  lower  limbs  to  the  front,  until  they  rise  above  the  level  of 
the  bars,  pass  them  over  and  let  them  rest  on  the  right  bar,  relaxing  the 


THE    PARALLEL    BARS. 


75 


extension  (Fig.  25) ;  press  strongly  with  the  hands,  elevate  the  lower  limhs 


Fig.  25. 


above  the  bar,  pass  them  between  the  bars,  and  let 
them  swing  to  the  rear,  at  the  same  time  bending  the 
arms  mitil  the  shoulders  are  as  low  as  the  bars, 
and  bringing  the  column  of  the  body  with  the 
lower  hmbs  to  the  horizontal  hne  of  the  bars  (Fig. 
26)  J  clear  the  right  bar  by  the  rear  and  descend 
yielding,  facing  the  bars. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  left  bar. 
The  same  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  fol- 
lowing yariations: — 
1.  lasting  on  the  right  bar  in  the  front  and  clearing  the  left  by  the  rear. 
Fig.  26.  2.  Resting  on  the  left  bar  in  the  front 

and  clearing  the  right  by  the  rear. 

24.  To  Rest  on  Both  Bars  in  Front, 
and  Clear  the  Right  by  the  Rear.— Post- 
tion  as  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Swing  the   lower   limbs,    the   toes 
to  the  front,  until  they  rise  above  the  level  of  the  bars ;  at  this 

point  separate  the  lower  limbs  and  let  them  rest  on  the  bars   (Fig.  27)^ 
Fig.  27.  i  raise    them  again    above  the  bars,  let   them 

sweep  to  the  rear,  as  in  preceding     exercise 
clear  the  right  bar,  and  descend  yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  reneated,  clearing  the  left 
bar. 

25.  To  Rest  on  the  Left  Bar  in  the  Rear,  and 
^  Clear  it  by  the  Front. — Position    as    in    nine- 
teenth exercise. 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  As  in  twenty-second  exercise  to  the  rest 
on  the  bi,r  j  incline  the  head  and  shoulders  to  the  front,  bend  the  arms 
nntil  the  Shoulders  are  as  low  as  the  bars,  the  head  between  them,  re-ele- 
vate the  liwer  limbs  and  passing  them  between  the  bars,  let  them  sweep 
to  the  front  and  clear  the  left  bar,  as  in  Fig.  24,  and  descend  yielding.  Dur- 
ing the  lasti  movement  bring  the  head  and  shoulders  to  the  vertical  posi-. 


pointec 


76 


THE    PARALLEL    BAB 


tion,  gradually  straighten  the  arms  and  retain  them  straight  while  the  feet 
clear  the  bar. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  right  bar. 

The  same  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  following  variations : — 

1.  Resting  on  the  left  bar  in  the  rear^  and  clearing  the  right  ir^  the  front. 

2.  Resting  on  the  right  bar  in  the  rear,  and  clearing  the  left  bjl^  the  front. 

26.  To  Rest  on  Both  Bars  in  the  Rear,  and  Clear  the  Right  Bar  by  the 
'Exoni.— Position  as  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Slowly  inchne  the  head  and  shoulders 
to  the  front,  bending  the  arms,  swing  the 
lower  limbs  to  the  rear,  until  they  rise  above 
the  level  of  the  bars,  fully  separate  them  and 
let  them  rest  on  the  bars  (Fig.  28) ;  incline 
the  head  and  shoulders  to  the  front,  re-ele- 
vate the  lower  limbs,  and  as  they  sweep  to 
the  front,  let  them  clear  the  right  bar,  and 
descend  yielding. 

-  This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  clearing  the  left  bar. 

27.  To  Pass  by  the  Rear  by  the  Single  Swing,— Pos^<^ow   ai 
teenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Swing  the  lower  limbs  until  the  feet  are  as 
high  as  the  face ;  from  this  let  them  fall  in  a  full 
sweep,  and  passing  between  the  bars,  rise  to  the 
rear  until  they  are  above  the  head;  during  the 
latter  half  of  this  oscillation,  let  the  arms  slowly 
"bend  until  the  shoulders  are  as  low  as  the  bars,  the 
head  between  them  (Fig.  29) ;  slowly  let  the  lower 
limbs  with  the  entire  column  of  the  body  in  posi- 
tion incline,  and  gradually  descend  to  the  right 
over  the  arm  (Fig.  30),  until  the  feet  come  to  the  »^ 
ground,  the  bar  on  the  right. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  over  the  left  bar. 

28.  To  Rest  on  the  Left  Bar  in  Front,  and  Clear  It  in  the 
Single  Swing. — Position  as  in  nineteenth  exercise. 


ntne- 


bythe 


PARALLEL    BARS. 


n 


As  in  nineteeqth  exercise. 
Swing  the  lower  limbs  to  the  front,  to  the  level  of  the  bars,  pass  them 
Fig.  30.  ^^^  °^®^  ^^^  1®^  them  rest  on  the  left  bar,  relaxing 

the  extension  (Fig.  31);  again  swing  the  lower 
limbs  above  the  bar,  pass  them  between  the 
bars,  and  as  in  preceding  exercise,  incline  the 
head  and  shoulders  to  the  front,  complete  the 
rearward  oscillation  (Fig.  32),  descending  to 
the  ground  over  the  left  bar,  the  bar  on  the  left. 
This  exercise  to  be  repeated  over  the  right 
bar. 

■   The  same  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the 
following  variations : 
on  the  left  bar  in  front  and  clearing  the  right  in  the  rear. 

Fi?.  32.  2.  Eesting  on  the  right 

Fijr.  Jl.  ]p^  bar  in  front  and  clearing 

the  left  in  the  rear. 

29.  To  Rest  on  Both  Bars 
in  Front,  and  Clear  the  Left 
Bar  in  the  Rear  by  the 
Single  Swing.— Po5^^M)w  as 
in  nineteenth  exercise. 
1.  As  in  nineteenth  ex- 


ercise. 

2.  Swing 


the      lower 


limbs,theftoes  pointed  to  the  front,  until  they  rise  above  the  level  of  the  bars; 
at  this  po^nt  separate  the  lower  lunbs  and  let  them  rest  on  the  bars  (Fig.  33); 


Fig.  33. 


press  strongly  with  the  hands,  again  swing  the 
lower  limbs  above  the  bars,  and  as  they  sweep 
to  the  rear,  inchne  the  head  and  shoulders  to 
thfe  front,  bending  the  arms  as  in  twenty- seventh 
exercise,  complete  the  rearward  oscillation  (Fig. 
34),  descending  to  the  ground  over  the  left  bar. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  clearing  the 
right  bar. 

30.  To  Rest  on  the  Left  Bar  in  the  Rear  by 


78 


THE    PARALLEL    B  A  B  S. 


the  Single  Swing  and  Clear  the  Eight  by  the  Rear.— Po5iYiow  as  in  nine- 
teenth exercise. 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  As  in  twenty-seventh  exercise  until  the  elevation  of  the  feet  above 
the  head ;  at  this  point  relax  the  extension  of 
the  legs,  pass  them  over  and  let  them  rest  on  the 
left  bar  (Fig.  35) ;  incline  the  head  and  shoul- 
ders to  the  front,  bend  the  arms  until  the  shoul- 
ders are  as  low  as  the  bars,  the  head  between 
them,  and  at  the  same  time  agaiQ  elevate  the 
lower  limbs  above  the  head  (Fig.  36) ;  pass  them 
across  the  bars  to  the  right;  descending  over 
the  right  bar. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  resting  on  the 
right  bar  and  clearing  the  left. 

31.  To  Pass  by  the  Front  by  the  Double 
Swing. — Position  as  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Swing  the  lower  limbs  until  the  feet  are  as  high  as  the  face  |  from  this 
point  let  them  descend,  and,  sweeping  between  the  bars,  ascend  jto  the  rear 
until  they  are  vertically  above  the  head,  the  arms  remaining  stiraight,  the 
€olumn  of  the  body  and  the  lower  limbs  slightly  curved  throughout  their 
length  (Fig.  37) ;  from  this  point  let  the  feet  again  descend,  and  passing  be- 


tween the  bars  on  the  return  oscillation,  clear  the  right 
bar  in  front,  and  descend  yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  over  the  left  bar. 

32.  To  Rest  on  the  Left  Bar  in  Front  and  Clear  it 
l)y  the  Double  Swing. — Position  as  in  nineteenth  exer- 
cise. 

1.  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Swing  the  lower  limbs  to  the  level  of  the  bars, 
pass  them  over  and  let  them  rest  on  the  left  bar,  re- 


Fi^.  35. 


laxing  the  extension  as 


in  Fig.  31 ;    press  strongly  with  the  hatds,  again 


the  bar,  pass  them  between  the  bars,  and 
the  double  swing  as  in  preceding  exercise,   clearing  the  left 


swing  the  lower  limbs  above 

complete 

bar. 


THE    P  ARAL  LE  L    BARS. 


79 


This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  right  bar. 

The  same/ exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  following  variations : — 

1.  Eestin^^  on  the  left  bar  in  front  and  clearing  the  right. 

2.  Eestiug  on  the  right  bar  in  front  and  clearing  the  left. 

33.  To  Jlest  on  Both  Bars  in  Front  and  Clear  the  Left  Bar  by  the  Double 
Swing. — Jfosition  as  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

Fig 
Fig.  36. 


37. 


1 .  As  in  nineteenth  exercise. 

2.  Swing  the  lower  limbs  to  the 
front,  until  they  rise  above  the 
level  of  the  bars ;  separate  them 
and  let  them  rest,  one  on  each  bar, 
as  in  Fig.  33 ;  press  strongly  with 
the  hands,  again  swing  the  lower 
limbs  above  the  bars,  and  com- 
plete the  double  swing  as  in 
thirty-first  exercise,  clearing  the 
left  bar. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated 
clearing  the  right  bar. 

34.  The  Single  March  and  E«st 

Forwards.— Pos^^iow    as   in  first 
exercise. 
L.  As  in  first  exercise. 

Swing  the  lower  limlis  and  bring  them  to  rest  on  the  left  bar,  as  in 
preceding  exercises  (Fig.  31) ;  inchne  the  head  and  shoulders  to  the  front, 


Fig.  38. 


re-grasp  'the  bars  in  advance  of  the  thighs  (Fig.  38), 
again  swing  the  lower  limbs  until  the  feet  are  above  the 
head,  as  in  thirtieth  exercise  (Fig.  39) ;  from  this  point 
let  them  slowly  descend,  and  passing  between  the  bars, 
sweep  to  the  front,  and  again  come  to  rest  on  the  left 
bar.  During  the  descent  of  the  lower  limbs,  gradually 
straighten  the  arms,  and  retain  them  straight  until  the 
legs  rest  on  the  bar.    Repeat. 

At  the  end  of  the  bars  on  the  last  elevation  of  the  feet 
above  the  head,  incline  the  trunk  and  lower  limbs  over  the 
left  bar  and  descend  yieldmg  as  in  twenty-seventh  exercise. 


80 


THE    PARALLEL    BARS. 


Fig.  39. 


This  exercise  to  be  repeated  on  the  left  bar. 

The  same  exercise  to  be  repeated  resting  on  the  right 
and  left  bar  alternately. 

35.  The  Single  March  and  Rest  Backwards.— Po^i^iow 
as  in  second  exercise. 

1.  As  in  second  exercise. 

2.  As  in  twenty-seventh  exercise  to  the  elevation  of 
the  feet  above  the  head ;  at  this  point  relax  the  extension 
of  the  legs,  pass  them  over  and  let  them  rest  on  the  right 
bar ;  pass  both  hands  behind  the  thighs  and  re-grasp  the 
bars  (Fig.  40),  re-elevate  the  lower  limbs,  pass  them  be- 


tween the  bars,  and  a^ain  let  them 


above 


the  head 
bar. 


right 


(Fig.  41)  and  again  come  to  the  rest 
Eepeat. 

At  the  end  of  the  bars,  on  the  last  elevation  of  the 
feet  above  the  head,  pass  over  the  right  bar,  as  in  prec 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated 
on  the  left  bar. 

The  same  exercise  to  be  re- 
peated, resting  on  the  right  and 
left  bar  alternately. 

36.  The  Double  March  and 
Rest  Forwards.— Posi^iow  as  in 
first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Swing  the  lower  limbs,  the 
toes  pointed  to  the  front,  until 
they  rise  above  the  level  of  the 
bars;  at  this  point  separate  the 
lower  limbs  and  let  them  rest  on 
the  bars ;  incline  the  head  and  shoulders  to  the  front,  re-grasp  the  bars  in 
advance  of  the  thighs  (Fig.  42),  raise  the  lower  limbs  until  the  feet  are 
above  the  head,  as  in  Fig.  43 ;  let  the  lower  hmbs  descend  and  again  come 
to  the  rest  in  front  on  both  bars.    Repeat. 

At  the  end  of  the  bars  on  the  last  elevation  of  the  feet  above  the  head, 
continue  the  movement  of  the  lower  hmbs,  carrying  the  feet  completely  over 


THE    PARALLEL    BARS, 


81 


the  head  to  the  front,  press  strongly  with  the  hands  and  descend  yieldmg, 
the  back  to  the  end  of  the  bars. 


Fig.  43. 


Fig.  42. 


37.  The  Double  March  and  East  Backwards.— PostYiow  as  in  second 
exercise, 

1,  As  in  second  ekercise. 

2.  As  in  twenty-seventh  exercise  to  the  elevation  of  the  feet  above  the 


Fig.  45. 


Fig.  44 


head ;  at  this  point  slowly  sep- 
arate the  legs,  relaxing  the  ex- 
tension, and  let  them  fall  to 
rest,  one  on  each  bar ;  pass  both 
hands  behind  the  thighs,  and 
re-grasp  the  bars  (Fig.  44); 
raise  the  lower  limbs  to  the 
front,  pass  them  between  the 
bars,  and  let  them  rise  until 
they  are  above  the  head  (Fig. 
slowly  separate  the  legs, 
relaxing  the  extension  and 
again  come  to  rest  on  the  bars. 
Repeat. 


THE    PARALLEL    BARS. 


Fig.  46. 


At  the  end  of  the  bars,  from  the  last  rest,  bring  the  ]ower 
lunbs  again  between  the  bars,  and  shoot  them  out  to  the 
rear  in  the  line  of  the  bars,  pushing  strongly  with  the  hands. 

38.  To  M^Fch  Above  the  Bars. — Position  as  in  first 
exercise.      ^ 

1.  Asin  first  exercise. 

2.  As  in  thirty-first  exercise  to  the  elevation  of  the  feet 
above  the  head  (Fig.  46)  j  retain  the  arms  straight,  advance 
the  right  hand  six  inches  beyond  the  left,  advance  the  left 
hand  six  inches  beyond  the  right.    Repeat. 

At  the  end  of  the  bars,  carry  the  feet  completely  over 
the  head  to  the  ground,  and  descend  yielding. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  backwards. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  arms  bent,  as  in 
Fig,  45. 


The  foregoing  exercises  include  all  the  movements  that  are  usually  prac- 
tised upon  the  Parallel  Bars ;  numerous  combinations  of  these  movements 
will  suggest  themselves  to  the  practised  learner,  the  majority  of  which  will 
be  obvious  enough,  and  still  leave  room  for  fertility  of  invention  and  inge- 
nuity in  performance. 


THE    EINGS 


Exercise  on  the  Kings  is  more  particularly  beneficial  to  the  upper  region 
of  the  trank,  and  to  the  arms,  although  in  the  various  motions  involved, 
there  is  scarcely  a  part  of  the  body  that  is  not  more  or  less  strengthened 
and  benefited. 

These  exercises  demand  more  attention  and  presence  of  mind  than  those 
on  the  bars,  but  they  habituate  the  gymnast  to  move  securely  and  grace- 
fully, and  furnish  also  a  good  remedy  for  dizziness. 

In  all  the  evolutions  the  instructor  should  grasp  the  right  wrist  of  the 
learner  with  one  hand,  and  as  soon  as  the  feet  have  passed  the  rings,  he 
should  with  the  other  govern  the  lower  limbs  in  their  descent.  While  the 
body  is  turning  with  the  feet  in  the  rings,  the  instructor  should  pass  his  left 
aim  under  the  waist  of  the  learner  to  limit  the  extent  of  its  descent,  always 
retaining  his  grasp  of  the  wrist.  In  the  turn  with  the  hands  (right  and  left) 
the  instiuctor  should  grasp  the  right  wrist  of  the  learner,  and  gradually 
lower  him  until  his  entire  weight  is  on  the  left,  and  vice  versa,  always 
gasping  the  hand  that  is  to  relinquish  the  hold  of  the  ring. 

The  position  of  the  instructor  should  be  on  the  right  or  left  of  the 
apparatus,  facing  the  pupil. 

The  rings  should  be  6  inches  in  diameter,  and  each  suspended  by  a 
rope  sufficiently  long  to  enable  the  gymnast  to  grasp  them  easily  with  his 
arms  upstretched,  and  the  ropes  about  18  inches  apart. 

1.  To  Turn  in  the  Socket. — Position  of  attention,  between  the  rings. 

1.  Raise  both  hands  and  grasp  the  rings,  one  in  each  hand,  lower  the 
body  to  the  reach  of  the  hands  and  pass  both  feet  to  the  front,  the  legs 
together  and  straight,  the  feet  together,  and  toes  pointed  to  the  front 
<Fig.  1). 


84 


THE    RINGS. 


2.  Lift  both  feet  from  the  ground,  and  pass  them  between  the  rings,  the 
arms  and  legs  straight  throughout  (Fig.  2) ,  slowly  descend  to  the  ground^ 
completing  the  circle  (Fig.  3),  and  rehnquish  the  grasp. 


Fig.  1. 


Fisr.  3. 


Fig  2. 


The  foregoing  is  a  description  of  the  exercise  as  it  should  be  executed  in 
its  perfect  form ;  but,  in  the  earlier  stages  of  practice  the  pupil  may  begin 
not  only  while  standing  upright  and  with  the  arms  bent,  but  a  spring  may 
be  taken  with  the  feet  to  assist  the  elevation  of  the  lower  limbs,  and  the 
knees  may  remain  bent  both  in  the  ascent  and  descent,  to  front  and  rear ; 
these  modifications  of  the  exercise  being  gradually  rehnquished  as  the  body 
acquires  strength,  until  it  can  be  executed  in  perfect  form. 

This  exercise  is  also  called  ^'The  Single  Circle." 

2.  The  Double  Circle. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  As  in  first  exercise  to  the  completion  of  the  single  circle,  but  instead  of 
relinquishing  the  grasp  of  the  hands,  return  between  the  rings  and  come  to 
the  first  position,  retaining  the  arms  and  legs  straight  throughout.   Bend  the  ^ 
arms,  replace  the  feet  upon  the  ground  under  the  rings,  and  quit  the  grasp. 

The  remarks  at  the  close  of  the  preceding  exercise,  apply  to  this  also. 

3.  To  Turn  with  the  Feet  in  the  Ringfs. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 
1.  As  in  first  exercise. 


THE    BING8. 


85 


2.  As  in  first  exercise  to  the  half  circle  (the  feet  between  the  rings), 


Pig.  4. 


separate  the  feet  right  and  left  and  insert  each  in  its 
respective  ring. 

3.  Eesume  with  the  trunk  of  the  body  the  action  of 
the  circle,  slowly  separating  the  knees,  lowering  and 
arching  the  Dack  and  raising  the  head  (Fig.  4). 

4.  Re-raise  the  trunk  to  its  position  at  the  half- 
circle,  remove  the  feet  from  the  rings,  straighten  the 
legs,  point  the  toes  upwards  and  let  them  gradually 
descend  to  the  front,  the  arms  straight,  and  come  to 
the  first  position. 

The  third  part  of  this  exercise  may  be  modified  the 
same  as  directed  in  the  concluding  remarks  to  the  first  exercise,  but  its 
distinj^uishing  feature,  that  of  turning  the  body  while  the  feet  remain  in  the 
rings^  must  always  be  executed  slowly,  the  back  sinking  gradually,  with 
■every  joint  of  the  spine  sharing  equally  in  the  depression,  and  the  chest 
gradually  rounding  and  expanding  under  the  same  influence. 
■/ 

Turn  on  One  Hand  Eight  and  Left. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

in  first  exercise. 

2.  As  in  first  exercise  to  the  completion  of  the  single 
circle,  but  instead  of  rehnquishing  the  grasp  with  both 
hands,  retain  the  grasp  of  the  right,  passing  the  left  arm 
down  by  the  side,  and  folding  the  lower  limbs  under  the 
body. 

3.  Make  a  complete  turn  laterally  from  left  to  right, 
re-grasp  the  ring  with  the  left  hand  (Fig.  5),  and  extend 
the  lower  limbs  to  the  front  as  in  first  position. 

4.  Ee-pass  the  feet  between  the  rings,  repeat  the  turn 
from  right  to  left,  relinquishing  the  right  hand  and  retain- 
ing the  grasp  with  the  left,  re-grasp  the  ring  with  the 
right,  extend  the  lower  limbs  to  the  front  and  come  to 
the  position. 

6.  To  Extend  the  Arms  Eight  and  Left. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 
1.  As  in  first  exercise. 


86 


THE    RINGfk 


2.  Bend  the  arms,  raising  the  lower  limbs  in  position ;  sustain  the  body 
on  the  left  hand  (retaining  it  close  by  the  side),  Fig.  6. 

extend  the  right  arm  holding  the  ring  at  the  full 
length  of  the  arm  (Fig.  6),  pause,  and  return  the 
right  hand  to  the  side ;  repeat  the  extension  with 
the  left  arm,  pause,  return  it  to  the  side,  lower  the 
body  and  come  to  the  position. 

6,  To  Rise  Above  the  Rings  Right  and  Left.— 
Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Bend  the  arms,  raising  the  lower  limbs  in  position,  press  strongly  on 


Fig.  7. 


Fiff.  8. 


the  ring  with  the  right  palm,  raising  the 
fore-arm  vertically  above  the  ring  (Fig.  7), 
repeat  the  movement  on  the  left,  press 
strongly  with  both  hands,  straighten  the 
arms  completely  above  the  rings  and 
pause  (Fig.  8) ;  the  chest  fully  advanced, 
the  head  held  back,  the  chin  elevated,  the 
legs  straight  and  together,  the  toes  pointed 
to  the  ground. 

In  descending,  re-bend  the  right  arm, 
the  left  following,  re-pass  the  riglit  below 
the  ring,  the  left  following,  lower  the  body 
and  come  to  position. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the 
left  hand  leading. 

This  exercise  is  sometimes  called  ^-Gettinig  Into /the  Eings." 

In  the  position  indicated  in  Fig.  8  the  beginner  ,knust  be  very  careful  not 
to  allow  the  arms  to  spread  open,  because  the  bod^  will  then  drop;  if  this 
should  happen  with  the  JcnucMes  upwards,  the  Tteight  of  the  body  would 
cause  a  severe  strain  on  the  shoulder  joints,  with  the  possibility  even  of 
dislocation,  by  being  suddenly  caught  in  the  position  indicated  in  Fig.  19. 

7.  To  Rise  Above  the  Rings  Both  Hands  at  Once,— JPosition  as  in  first 
exercise. 

1   As  in  first  exercise. 


TEE    RINGS. 


&i^ 


2.  Grasp  the  rings,  instantly  press  strongly  on  the  rings  with  both 
Fig.  9.  Fig.  10.       hands,  and  raise  both  arms  vertically 

above  the  rings  (Fig.  9),  and  rise  above 
the  rings  to  the  full  extension  of  the 
arms  (Fig.  10);  the  transition  from 
the  bend  to  the  extended  position  of 
the  arms  taking  place  without  pause. 

In  descending,  bend  both  arms  at 
once,  pass  them  below  the  rings,  lower 
the  body  and  come  to  the  position. 

Attention  is  called  to  the  remarks 
at  the  close  of  the  previous  exercise. 

8.  To  Else  Above  the  Rings  Back- 
wards, Right  and  Le^.— Position  as  is 
first  exercise. 
T7~A^  in  first  exercise. 

2.  As  in  first  exercise  to  the  completion  of  the  single  circle ;  elevate  the 
Fig.  11.  Fig.  12.        right    side,    lean    slightly    forward,    press 

strongly  with  the  right  hand,  and  raise  the 
right  fore-arm  vertically  above  the  ring  (Fig. 
11),  repeat  the  movement  on  the  left,  press 
strongly  with  both  hands,  and  rise  above 
the  rings  as  in  seventh  exercise  (Fig.  12). 

Descend  as  in  seventh  exercise. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left 
hand  leading. 

It  would  be  well  to  bear  in  mind  the  re- 
marks at  the  close  of  sixth  exercise. 

9.  To  Rise  Above  the  Rings  Backwards, 
Both  Hands  at  Once- — Position  as  in  first 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Lift  both  feet  from  the  ground  and  pass  them  between  the  rings,  and 
at  the  same  time  rapidly  bend  the  arms,  raising  the  body  between  the  rings 
until  the  hands  are  close  at  the  side,  instantly  press  with  both  hands  and 
raise  the  fore-arms  vertically  above  the  rings  (Fig.  13),  straighten  the  arms, 


THE    RINGS, 


continue  the  movement  of  the  circle  with  the  lower  lunbs,  and  let  the  body 
rise  between  the  rings  in  the  position  of  Fig.  13.  Fig.  14. 


seventh  exercise  (Fig.  14). 
at  end  of  sixth  exercise. 


See  remarks 


Vi 


10.  To  Start  Up  Above  the  Rings.  - 

Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise,  but  the  toes 
pointing  downwards. 

2.  Raise  the  lower  limbs  as  in  Fig.  15,  drop  them  again  with 
a  sudden  start,  and  at  the  same  time  bend  the  arms  and  raise 
the  body  quickly  above  the  rings  (Fig.  14). 

Fig.  15. 

11.  To  Form  the  Straight  Line 
Backwards. — Position  as  in  first  ex- 
ercise. 

1 .  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  As  in  first  exercise  to  the  half  circle  (Fig. 
2),  but  instead  of  lowering  the  feet  to  tile  ground, 
extend  them  to  the  rear  until  the  lower/limbs  and 
trunk  form  one  perfect  horizontal  line/(Fig.  16). 

Relax  the  extension  of  the  lowe|  limbs,  let 
the  feet  descend  to  the  rear,  and  come  to  the  position.  | 

12.  To  Form  the  Straight  Line  For-  Fig.  ic. 
wards. — Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Raise  both  hands  and  grasp  the 
rings ;  raise  the  lower  limbs  to  the  front 
in  position,  the  toes  pointed  to  the  front, 
and  allowing  the  head  and  shoulders  to 
fall  to  the  rear,  the  arms  slightly  bent, 
until  the  lower  limbs  and  trunk  form  one 
perfect  horizontal  line  (Fig.  17). 

Relax  the  extension,  let  the  feet  de- 
scend to  the  ground  and  come  to  the  position. 

13.  To  Stand  Above  the  Ring^. — Position  as  in  first  exercise,  \ 
1.  Rise  above  the  rings  as  in  seventh  exercise  (Figs.  9  and  10). 


THE    RINGS. 


2.  Incline  the  head  and  shoulders  to  the  front,  bending  the  arms  and 


Fig.  18. 


Fig.  17.  pressing   them   close  in 

by  the  sides,  and  at  the 
same  time  raise  the  lower 
limbs  in  position  by  the 
rear  until  they  are  above 
the  head,  forming  with 
the  trunk  of  the  body 
one  perfect  vertical  line 

between  the  rings  (Fig.  IB). 

Relax  the  extension,  briiig  the  lower  limbs  down  by  the 

front  to  the  ground  and  come  to  the  position. 


14.  To  Stand  Below  the  'Bim^^.— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 
1.  Rise  above  the  rings  as  in  seventh  exercise  (Figs.  9  and  TO). 

2.  Slowly  let  the  whole  body  descend  in 
position  between  the  rings,  at  the  same  time 
extending  the  arms  perfectly  straight  right 
-^and  left,  strongly  pressing  downwards  with 
the  palms,  until  the  arms  are  at  right  angles 
with  the  body  (Fig.  19) ;  relax  the  extension 
and  slowly  lower  the  feet  to  the  ground,  and 
come  to  the  position. 

This  is  one  of  Fig,  20. 

the  most  difficult, 
and  the  same 
time  dangerous, 
exercises  with  the 
rings;  a  little 
carelessness 
might  easily  re- 
sult in  a  dislocation  of  the  arms  or  shoulders. 

15.  To  Swing  in  the  'Rm^.— Position  as  in 
first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise,  but  the  toes  pointing  downward. 

2.  When  the  body  swings  forward  raise  the  legs  up  without  bending 
them  (Fig.  20),  and  at  the  instant  the  body  commences  to  swing  back 


\ 


90 


THE    BING8. 


extend  it  forcibly  out  to  increase  the  impetus  of  the  swing.    After  the  body 

has  passed  the  centre,  on  the  return  backward  swing  raise         pig.  21. 

it  slightly  with  the  arms  (Fig.  21) ;  this  will  give  momentum 

to  the  return  forward  swing.    Do  not  kick  with  the  legs, 

but  keep  them  straight. 

Fig.  22. 

16.  The  Simplicity  Swing. — Position  as 

in  preceding  exercise. 

1.  Swing  as  directed  in  the  preceding 
exercise  and  when  the  body  is  sufiflciently 
high,  bring  the  legs  up  between- the  arms,, 
keeping  them  perfectly  straight  (Fig.  22),  and  return 
them  to  their  original  position  at  the  other  end  of  the 
swing.  This  motion  if  done  at  the  right  time  will  in- 
crease the  impetus  of  the  swing. 

17.  To  Rise  Above  the  Rings  at  the  Backward  Swing.— Po5^Y^ow  as  in 
first  exercise. 

1 .  Swmg  up  well  in  front  (Fig.  23),  and  on  the  return  backward  swing, 
rise  above  the  rings  (&)  by  either  of  the  methods  described  in  the  seventh, 
ninth,  or  tenth  exercises.  Care 
must  be  taken  to  keep  the 
rings  close  to  the  body, 

18.  To  Rise  Above  the  Rings 
at  the  Forward  Swing. — Posi- 
tion as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Swing  well  forward  (Fig. 

24-a),   and  after  passing  the 

centre,  rise  above  the  rings  as 

in  the  preceding  exercise  (6), 

when  the  body  has  reached 

the    point    a,    on   the  return 

backward  swing,  extend  the 

arms  for  the  return  forward. 

Keep  the  rings  close  to  the  body. 

This  and  the  preceding  exercise  may  be  varied  as  follows : 

First. — ^Allow  the  body  to  sink  in  the  forward  swing,  and  raise  it  in  the 

backward. 


THE    RINGS. 


91 


92 


THE    BING8. 


Second. — Sink  the  body  in  tlie  backward  swing,  and  raise  it  in  the 
forward. 

Third. — Lower  the  "body  in  the  forward  swing,  and  raise  it  again  imme- 
diately, before  the  turn. 

Fourth. — Repeat  the  above  in  the  backward  swing  only. 

Fifth. — Execute  the  fall  and  rise  quickly,  both  in  the  backward  and 
forward  swing. 

19.  To  Jump  to  the  Ground  on  the  Backward  Swing. 


1.  When  in  a  good 
backward  swing,  raise 
the  body  with  the  arms 
(Fig.  25),  let  go  the 
grasp  of  the  rings  and 
drop  to  the  ground  on 
the  toes. 


Fig.  25. 


(33®^^''^^;^:=^ 


20.  To  Turn  in  the 
Socket  While  Swinging 
Backward.— Posi^iow  as 
in  first  exercise. 

1.  Swing  well  forward  as  in  Fig.  26-a,  and  when  at  the  centre  on  the 
return  backward,  raise  the  legs  (6),  and  turn  out  as  in  c,  ready  for  the 
return  forward.  (See  exercises  first  and  second.)  When  making  the  turn 
(c)  the  arms  should  be  spread  apart. 

21,  The  Beverse  Turn  Forward— Posi^tow  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise  (Fig.  27 -a). 

2.  Swing  backward  and  with  a  quick  spreading  apart  of  the  arms  throw 
forward  the  body  into  position  6,  remain  in  this  position  while  on  the 
return  swing;  and  when  well  forward,  raise  the  body  and  throw  it  over  as 
in  c,  in  time  for  the  return  swing  backward. 

Vary  this  and  the  preceding  exercise  as  follows : 

First.— ^^QCxxiQ  the  Socket  Turn  (twentieth  exercise)  at  every  backward 

swing. 

Second.  —Perform  the  same  exercise  at  the  end  of  the  forward  swing. 

j^^y^.—Kepeat  the  above  exercises  alternately  on  the  backward  and 
forward  swing. 


THE    RING 


93 


Fourth. — Execute  the  Reverse  Turn  in  the  forward  swing,  bringing  the 
body  over  when  returning. 

Fifth. — Perform  the  same  exercise  in  the  backward  swing. 

Sixth. — Eepeat  the  two  preceding  exercises  alternately  on  the  forward 
and  backward  swing. 

Seventh. — Execute  the  Reverse  Turn  in  the  backward  swing  without 
carrying  the  legs  over,  returning  to  the  first  position  at  the  end  of  the 
forward  swing. 

Eighth. — Execute  the  preceding  exercise  on  the  forward  swing. 

Ninth. — ^Execute  the  twentieth  and  twenty-first  exercises  alternately; 
the  former  in  i\iQ  forward  swing,  and  the  latter  in  tl;e  backward  swing. 

Great  care  must  be  observed  to  give  the  motion  to  the  body  at  the  right 
time,  or  a  check  in  the  swing  will  be  the  consequence,  and  the  beauty  of 
the  performance  will  be  greatly  marred. 


22.  To  Jump  to  the  Ground  on  the  Forward  Swing. 


Fig.  28. 


1.  Swing  forward  (Fig.  28-a), 
at  almost  the  extreme  point  of 
the  forward  swing,  raise  the  legs 
quickly  outside  of  the  arms  (Z>), 
let  go  the  hands  and  ahght  on 
the  ground  (c). 

The  preparatory  raismg  of 
the  legs  and  final  drop  must  be 
just  before  the  extreme  point  is 
reached,  because  the  body  re- 
quires some  slight  remaining  im- 
petus to  prevent  falling  back- 
wards. 


COMBINATIONS. 


When  sufficient  skill  has  been  attauied  m  the  foregomg  exercises,  two, 
three,  or  more  of  them  may  be  combined  and  executed  without  pause.  The 
following  are  some  of  the  combinations  that  may  be  made,  and  others  can 
be  devised  at  discretion. 


9*  THE    RINGS 


COMBINATIOXS  OF  TWO  EXEKCISES 

Nos  2  and  3  The  double  circle — to  turn  with  the  feet  in  the  rings 

Xos.  2  and  4.  The  double  circle — to  turn  on  one  hand  right  and  left. 

Nos.  2  and  6  or  8.  The  double  circle — to  rise  above  the  rings  backwards. 

Nos.  2  and  8.  The  double  circle — to  rise  above  the  rings. 

Nos.  2  and  11.  The  double  circle — to  form  the  straight  line  backwards. 

COMBINATIONS  OF  THREE  EXERCISES. 

Nos.  2,  4  and  5.      The  double  circle — ^to  turn  on  one  hand  right  and  left — to 

extend  the  arms  right  and  left. 
Nos.  2,  7  and  4.      The  double  circle — to  rise  above  the  rings  both  hands  at 

once — to  turn  on  one  hand  right  and  left. 
Nos.  2,  8  and  7.      The  double  circle — to  rise  above  the  rings  backwards — 

to  rise  above  the  rings  both  hands  at  once. 
Nos.  2,  7  and  13.    The  double  circle — to  rise  above  the  rings  both  hands  a 

once — to  stand  above  the  rings. 

COMBINATIONS  OF  FOUR  EXERCISES. 

Nos.  2,  7,  4  and  11.    The  double  circle — to  rise  above  the  rings  both  hands 
at  once — to  turn  on  one  hand  right  and  left — to 
form  the  straight  line  backwards. 
Nos.  2j  7,  13  and  3.    The  double  circle — to  rise  above  the  rings  both  hands 
at  once — ^to  stand  above  the  rings — to  turn  with 
the  feet  in  the  rings. 
Nos.  7, 13,  2  and  11.    To  rise  above  the  rings  both  hands  at  once — to  stand 
above  the  rings — the  double  circle — to  form  the 
straight  line  backwards. 


COMBINATIONS  OF  FIVE  EXERCISES. 

Nos.  2,  7,  4,  11  and  13.    The  double  circle — to  rise  above  the  rings  both. 

hands  at  once — to  turn  on  one  hand  right  and 
left — to  form  the  straight  line  backwards — to 
stand  above  the  rings. 

Nos,  7, 13,  3,  5  and  12.    To  rise  above  the  rings  both  hands  at  once^to 

stand  above  the  rings — ^to  turn  with  the  feet  in 
the  rings — to  extend  the  arms  right  and  left— 
to  form  the  straight  line  forwards. 


THE    BOW    OF    EINGS. 


Fig.  2. 


The  single  exercise  on  this  apparatus  is  a  very  simple  one,  and  if  the 
proper  elevation  of  the  rings  from  the  floor  be  preserved,  it  may  be  safely 
practised  without  supervision.  It  has  a  special  object,  viz.,  the  equahza- 
tion  in  strength  and  development  of  the  two  sides  of  the  upper  half  of  the 
body,  and  of  the  arms;  for  the  weaker  side  will  actually  do  more,  being  the 
weaker,  and  consequently  it  will  in  time  overtake  and  rank  with  its  fellow 
in  development  and  capacity. 

The  row  of  rings  should  consist  of  not  less  than  five  or  six  rings  similar 
to  those  already  described,  and  there  may  with  advantage  be  a  greater 
Fiff.  1.  number,  if  the  length  of  the  gymnasium  will 

admit  of  it.  They  should  be  suspended  at  a 
height  of  not  less  than  6  feet  3  inches  from 
the  floor,  and  at  equal  distances  apart,  the 
distances  should  not  be  less  than  8  feet  or 
more  than  10  feet,  and  the  point  to  which 
the  ropes  are  hung  should  Fig.  3. 

never    exceed    20   feet 
ibove  the  floor. 

The  Swing.— Position 

of  attention,  facing  the 

first  ring,  the  back  to 

the  row. 

1.  Kaise  the  left  hkid 

and  grasp  the  ring  (Fig.\ 

1),  advance  with  short 
and  rapid  steps  \nd  springing  from  the  ground  at  the 
end  of  the  run,  fkpm  the  left  foot,  turn  quickly  to  the 
right,  bending  the  iWer  limbs  at  the  knees  and  pomt- 
ing  the  toes  to  the  rear,  the  head  erect,  the  breast 
advanced  (Fig.  2);  on  approaching  the  second  ring  extend  the 

J>mpBirtw^r.t  of  nyufhail  BdueatioB 

Ui»»^ of  California 

IC  r.:i3lum  for  Hen 

i^rkdley  4.  California 


ht  hand 


96  THE    BOW    OF    RINGS. 

and  grasp  it,  and  while  retaining  it  lightly  in  the  hand,  return  to  the 
farthest  point  of  the  backward  oscillation  on  the  ring  grasped  by  the  left 
(Fig.  3);  at  this  point  quit  the  grasp  of  the  left,  withdrawing  the  hand 
hghtly  and  leaving  the  ring  motionless,  turn  to  the  right  and  bring  the  left 
hand  in  a  full  sweep  round  by  the  thigh,  the  arm  quite  straight  and  fingers 
pointed  downwards,  describing  a  half  circle  in  the  sweep,  extend  it  to  the 
front,  and  grasp  the  next  ring.  Kepeat.  On  grasping  the  last  ring  turn 
quickly  round,  facing  the  row,  and  descend  yielding. 


The  exercises  on  the  Kings  will  be  found  exceedingly  difficult  at  first; 
they  all  require  great  strength  in  the  wrists  especially,  and  in  the  muscles  of 
the  arm  generally.  The  rings  are  perfectly  free  to  move  in  every  direction, 
and  consequently  afford  an  entirely  unreliable  .support;  they  must  be  kept 
in  their  proper  position  by  muscular  effort  alone,  and  the  beginner  will  find 
them  twist  from  his  grasp  and  display  a  tendency  to  go  in  every  direction 
except  the  one  he  desires.  Consequently,  when  the  movements  on  the  rings 
have  been  fairly  mastered,  the  development  of  muscular  power  and  the 
perfection  of  equilibrium  which  the  learner  has  thereby  acquired,  will  be 
found  of  immense  service  in  performing  difiBcult  feats  on  the  swinging 
Trapeze.  The  learner  must  always  bear  in  mind  that  nothing  can  be 
accomphshed  without  muscle,  nerve,  will-power  and  persistent  practice ; 
these  alone  will  enable  him  to  discover  the  exact  moment  when  the  energies 
must  be  concentrated,  as  it  were,  to  render  the  muscles  entirely  obedient  to 
the  will. 


THE    TRAPEZE. 


The  Trapeze  is  practically  a  combination  of  the  horizontal  bar  with  the 
rings,  and  unites  the  firm  gi-asp  of  the  bar  with  the  graceful  motions  of  the 
rings. 

This  apparatus  ranks  in  importance  with  the  horizontal  bars  on  account 
of  the  power  which  the  exercises  possess  of  increasing  the  capabilities  of  the 
trunk  and  upper  limbs.  The  movements  are  also  of  an  artistic  character 
and  very  effective,  and,  like  those  on  the  rings,  require  great  nerve  and 
presence  of  mind  in  their  execution. 

The  exercises  given  for  the  trapeze  are  necessarily  very  similar  to  those 
upon  the  horizontal  bar,  in  some  instances  identical,  and  necessarily  so, 
from  the  fact  that  the  trapeze  is  a  bar,  but  free  to  swing  instead  of 
stationary. 

Some  exercises,  prominently  those  where  wrist-power  is  required,  are 
more  difficult  of  execution  on  the  trapeze  than  on  the  bar,  because  in  the 
latter  case  the  rigidity  of  the  bar  serves  as  a  purchase  for  the  wrist  which  is 
entirely  absent  in  the  case  of  the  movable  trapeze-bar.  On  the  other  hand, 
some  of  the  swing  exercises  are  easier  on  the  trapeze  than  on  the  horizontal 
bar,  the  oscillation  of  the  trapeze  materially  aiding  the  swing  motion  of 
the  body. 

The  learner  will  find  that  the  proficiency  he  has  gained  on  the  horizontal 
bar  and  with  the  rings  will  materially  aid  him  in  his  evolutions  on  the 
trapeze. 

The  best  grasp  for  the  instructor,  in  directing  the  evolutions  on  the 
trapeze,  is  a  firm  hold  of  the  wrist  with  the  left  hand,  the  right  firmly 
grasping  the  ankle. 

The  position  of  the  instructor  should  be  on  the  right  or  left  of  the 
trapeze,  facing  the  learner. 

The  bar  of  the  trapeze  should  be  2  feet  4  inches  in  length,  not  over  li 
inch  in  diameter,  with  a  steel  core  in  the  centre;  the  ropes  should  be 
neatly  spliced  into  brass  eyes,  and  be  suspended  from  a  height  of  18  to  24 
feet,  and  the  bar  hanging  at  a  suitable  height  to  allow  the  feet  to  clear  the 

97 


THE    TRAPEZE. 


ground.     Beginners  may  practise  on  a  trapeze  suspended  at  a  height  of 
4  feet  6  inches  from  the  ground.      -^  >  :   . 

1.  To  Rise  by  the  Single  "Bio^e.— Position  of  attention,  the  trapeze  in 


■Fig-  1. 


profile  on  the  left. 

1.  Raise  the  right  hand  and  grasp  the  rope  a 
hand's-breadth  above  the  bar,  the  left  following  in 
the  interspace  (Fig.  1). 

2.  Lift  both  feet  from  the  ground,  the  legs  straight 
and  together,  the  toes  pointed  to  the  front,  and  pass 
them  over  the  bar,  elevating  the  body  until  the  hip 
rests  on  its  surface  (Fig.  2) ;  press  downwards  with- 
the  hands  and  rise  seated  on  the  bar,  retaining  the 
grasp  of  the  rope  (Fig.  3). 

In  descending  lean  slowly  backwards  and  side- 
wards, bringing  the  hip  again  on  the  bar,  remove  the 
lower  limbs  from  it,  and  come  to  the  first  position. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  trapeze  on 
the  right,  the  left  hand  uppermost. 

All  these  exercises  may  be  practised  by  beginners, 
the  form  of  each,  given  in  the  text,  being  the  perfect 
one,  but  capable  of  modification  for  initiatory  practice. 
Thus  in  introducing  a  beginner  to  the  present  exer- 
cise, instead  of  grasping  the  rope  a  hand's-breadth 
above  the  bar,  he  may  grasp  it  a  foot  or  even  more 
above  the  bar,  the  left  hand  following  close  under  the 
right,  and  then  day  by  day  the  space  between  the 
hands  and  the  bar  should  be  reduced,  until  these  are 
placed  as  directed  in  the  text. 


2.  To  Rise  by  Both  Ropes.— Pos^^iow  of  attention, 
facing  the  trapeze. 

1.  Raise  both  hands  and  grasp  the  ropes,  one  in 
each  hand,  close  to  the  bar. 

2.  Lift  both  feet  from  the  ground,  and  pass  them 
under  the  bar  between  the  hands,  at  the  same  time 
allowing  the  head  and  shoulders  to  fall  backwards  and  straightening 
arms;  and  by  a  continuous  movement  bend  the  back  inwards,  and  extei 


THE    TRAPEZE. 


limbs  upwards  (Fig.  4),  bending  the  arms  until  the  hips  are  as 
high  as  the  bar;  slowly  let  the  feet  descend  to  the  ijont,  and  at 
the  same  time  and  at  the  same  pace  let  the  trunk,  shoulders, 
and  head  ascend,  and  come  to  the  seat  on  the  bar,  retaining 
the  grasp.  During  this  last  movement  let  the  chin  be  elevated, 
the  shoulders  pressed  back,  the  breast  advanced  square  to  the 
front. 

In  descending,  lower  the  body  from  the  bar  backwards,  let 
the  lower  limbs  fall  to  the  rear,  repass  the  feet  under  the  bar, 
and  come  to  the  first  position. 

The  remarks  at  the  conclusion  of  the  preceding  exercise 
may  also  be  literally  followed  in  this  one,  and  are  generally  ap- 
plicable to  all  the  exercises. 

3.  To  Rise  by  the  Back  JASt,— Position  as  in  second  exercise. 
1.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  reach  and  grasp  the  rope,  raise  the  left 
hand  and  grasp  the  bar  at  its  centre. 

Fig.  5.  2.  Lift  both  feet  from  the  ground  (the  toes  pointed  down- 

wards), by  the  flexion  of  the  right  arm  and  the  extension  of 
the  left,  and  rise  until  the  face  is  as  high  as  the  right  hand, 
the  left  arm  straight  above  the  hand  grasping  the  bar  (Fig. 
5) ;  turn  to  the  right,  the  back  to  the  bar,  and  sit  in  the 
space  between  the  left  hand  and  the  right  rope  (Fig.  G), 
retaining  the  grasp. 

In  descending,  raise  the  body  and  return  the  face  to  the 
bar,  lower  the  body  slowly  to  the  ground. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  Fig.  6. 

the  left  hand  on  the  rope. 

The  initiatory  practice  may  be 
accompanied  by  a  spring  from  the 
ground,  which  should  be  gradually 
l^sened   until  the  effort  falls  entirely  upon  tHe" 
upper  limbs,  as  iudicated  in  the  text. 

\4.  To  Rise  by  the  Front  Lift. — Position  as  in 
secdnd  exercise. 

\.  As  in  third  exercise. 


100 


THE    TRAPEZE. 


2.  As  in  third  exercise  until  the  left  arm  is  straight  above  the  bar  (Fig.  5)  - 


raise  the  feet  and  pass  them  over  the  bar  through 
the  space  between  the  left  hand  and  the  right  rope 
(Fig.  7),  extend  the  legs,  point  the  toes  to  the  front,  and 
come  to  the  seat  on  the  bar,  retaining  the  grasp. 

In  descending,  withdraw  the  feet  through  the  inter- 
space, and  slowly  lower  them  to  the  groimd. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  hand  on  the 
rope. 

The  remarks  at  the  conclusion  of  the  third  exercise 
may  also  be  literally  followed  in  this  one. 


Fig.  7. 


-Position  as  in  sepond 
Fig.  8. 


5.  To  Turn  Round  the  Ropes,  Right  and  Left.- 
exerdse. 

1.  As  in  third  exercise. 

2.  As  in  fourth  exercise  to^  the  seat  on  the  bar. 

3.  Raise  the  left  hand  frc^m  the  bar  and  grasp 
the  right  rope  as  high  as  /the  face,  slip  the  right 
hand  down  to  the  bar,  anA  grasp  it  close  to  the 
rope  with  the  thumb  to  t\ik  front,  the  fingers  to  the 
rear;  hft  the  body  from /the  bar,  pass  round  the 

Fig.  9.  ^utside  of  the  right  rope; 

the  feet  leading  (Fig.  8), 
I /pass  the  lower  limbs  be- 
tween the  ropes,  and  again 
come  to  the  seat  on  the 
bar. 

4.  Repeat  the  movement  round  the  left  rope, 
reversing  the  respective  positions  of  the  hands. 

Descend  as  in  fourth  exercise. 

In  this  exercise  the  hmbs  should  be  supported 
and  guided  by  the  instructor,  this  support  being 
gradually  withdrawn,  until  the  learner  can  execute 
the  movements  without  help. 

6.  To  Turn  Round  the  Bar  Forwards. — Position 
as  in  second  exercise. 


THE    TBAPEZE. 


101 


1.  Rai^e  both  bands  and  grasp  tbo  bar,  tho  bands  at  the  distance,  the 
Fig.  If  backs  of  the  hands  upwards,  the  fingers  and  thumbs  meet- 
ing ;  extend  the  lower  Umbs  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time 
sinking  to  the  reach  of  the  hands;  the  legs  together  and 
straight,  the  feet  together  with  the  toes  pointed  to  the  front 
(Fig.  9). 

2.  Lift  the  feet  from  the  ground,  the  lower  limbs  in  posi- 
tion, the  arms  remaining  perfectly  straight,  until  the  feet 
are  as  high  as  the  bar  (Fig.  10) ;  bend  the  arms,  and  at  the 
same  time  elevate  the  body  until  the  waist  is  as  high  as  the 
bar,  pass  the  lower  limbs  over  the  bar,  the  trunk  following, 
revolving  on  the  waist  (Fig.  11),  lower  the  body,  completing 
the  circle,  and  slowly  descend  until  the  feet  meet  the  ground  5 
fFig.  11.  relinquish  the  grasp  of  the  hands. 

In  the  initiatory  practice  of  this  exercise  a  shght  spring  may 
be  taken,  and  both  arms  and  legs  allowed  to  remain  bent ;  the 
spring  may  then  be  dispensed  with ;  next,  the  legs  may  remain 
bent  at  the  commencement,  and  be  extended  during  the  rise; 
to  be  followed  by  the  straight  leg  aud  bent  arm,  leading  direct 
to  the  perfect  exercise. 

7.  To  Turn  Round  the  Bar  Backwards, — Position  as  in 
second  exercise.  , 

1.  As  in  sixth  exercise. 

2.  As  in  sixth  exercise  until  the  feet  arc  as  high  as  t^e  bar 
(Fig.  10) ;  pass  the  feet  under  the  bar  between  the  haijds,  and 
by  a  continuous  movement  bend  the  back  Fig.  ]^. 
inwards  and  extend  the  lower  limbs  up- 
wards, bending  the  arms  until  the  waist  is  as  high  as 
the  bar  (Fig.  12),  let  the  lower  half  of  the  body  slowly 
fall  to  the  front,  and  as  it  descends  let  the  upper  half 
ascend  in  position,  the  head  well  thrown  back,  and  sink 

lowly  down,  the  back  touching  the  bar  (Fig.  13),  until 
he  feet  meet  the  ground;  relinquish  the  grasp  of  the 
ands. 
In  this  exercise  the  gradations  by  which  it  may  be 
approached  are  less  marked;  it  may  be  viewed  as  com- 

ncing  where  the  second  exercise  terminates,  and  there  is  no  intermediate 


V 


102 


THE    TRAPEZE. 


practice ;  nothiDg  but  perseverance  against  repeated  failures  wiU  overcome 
the  diflSculty,  lor  the  position  is  not  such  as  vrill  admit  of  direct  help  from 
the  instructor;  and  all  that  can  be  given  in  this  exercise  must      Fig.  13. 
be  but  the  steadying  of  the  limbs^  enabling  the  learner  to  hold 
his  own. 

8.  To  Turn  Round  the  Bar  Backwards,  and  'Rjeiwrn.,— Position 
as  in  second  exercise. 

1.  As  in  sixth  exercise. 

2.  As  in  precedmg  exercise  to  its  completion,  but  at  tUis 
point,  instead  of  relinquishing  the  grasp,  press  from  the  han^s. 


3 

I 

irJd, 


straighten  the  arms,  bending  the  back 
inwards,  and  rise  to  the  seat  on  the  bla 
slowly  let  the  head  and  shoulders  fall 
to  the  rear,  re-pass  the  feet  under  'he 
bar,  straighten  the  legs,  lower  ;he 
body,  and  return  to  the  first  position 

9.  To  Rise  Above  the  Bar,  Rigft   and  Left.- 
Position  as  in  second  exercise. 

1.  As  in  sixth  exercise. 

2.  Lift  both  feet  from  the  groui 
bend  the  arms  until  the  breast  is  ks 

high  as  the  bar,  press  strongly  with  the  right  hand  upon  tlie 
bar  and  raise  the  fore-arm  vertically  above  it  (Fig.  14) ;  repeait 
the  movement  with  the  left  hand,  complete  the  extension  of 
both  arms,  and  come  to  the  upright  position,  resting  on  the 
bar  (Fig.  15). 

In  descending,  re-bend  the  right  arm,  and  pass  it  below  the 
bar,  the  left  following,  lower  the  body  and  come  to  the  first 
position. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  left  and  right. 

This  exercise  has  no  gradations  on  the  trapeze,  but  may  be 
approached  nearly  by  practice  on  the  horizontal  bar,  which 
being  fixed  and  firm  renders  the  practice  less  difficult. 

10.  To  Rise  Above  the  Bar,  Both  Hands  at  Once.— Position  as  in  second 
exercise. 

] .  As  in  sixth  exercise. 


THE    TRAPEZE. 


103 


both  feet  from  the  ground,  "bend  the  arms  mitil  the  breast  is  as 
16.  high  as  the  bar,  press  strongly  upon  the  bar  with  both 

hands  at  once  and  rise  above  it  (Fig.  IG),  completing 
the  extension  of  the  arms,  and  come  to  the  upright 
position,  resting  on  the  bar  as  in  Fig.  15. 

This  series  of  movements  to  be  executed  without 
pause,  and  at  the  same  pace  throughout. 

In  descending,  re-bend  the  arms,  pass  them  below 
the  bar,  and  come  to  the  first  position. 

The  concluding  remarks  to  the  preceding  exercise 
apply  equally  well  to  this. 


Fig.  18. 


from  head  to  foot, 


11.  To  Turn  Under  the  Bar  on  One  Hand.— Posiiiow 
as  in  second  exercise. 

1.  As  in  sixth  exercise. 

2.  As  in  sixth  exercise,  until  the  feet  are  as  high  as 
the  bar  (Fig.  10) ;  pass  the  feet  under  the  bar  between 
the  hands,  and  let  them  descend  close  to  the  ground, 
but  without  touching  it  (Fig.  37);  quit  the  grasp  of 
the  left  hand,  at  the  same  time  folding  the  lower 
limbs  close  under  the  body,  and  swinging  round  by 
the  right,  make  a  complete  turn  laterally,  and  again 
come  to  the  front  (Fig.  18),  re-grasp  the  bar  with  the 
left  hand,  extend  the  legs,  again  raise  the  feet  to  the 
bar  and  re-pass  them  under  it,  quit  the  grasp  with  the 
right  hand,  swinging  round  by  the  left,  re-grasp  the 
bar  with  the  right  hand,  extend  the  legs  and  come  to 
the  first  position. 

This  exercise  may  be  approached  by  practice  on  an 
apparatus  that  turns  with  the  hand,  such  as  the  rings. 

12.  To  Form  the  Straight  Lme.— Position  as  in 
second  exercise. 

1 .  As  in  sixth  exercise. 

2.  As  in  preceding  exercise  until  the  feet  are  passed 
under  the  bar ;  at  this  point  extend  the  legs  to  the 
rear  and  pause,  forming  a  perfectly  horizontal  lino 

suspended  by  the  arms  under  the  bar  (Fig.  19) ;  relax 


\ 


dOl  THE     TRAPEZE. 


the  extension,  re-pass  the  feet  under  the  bar,  extend  the  legs  in  front,  and 
come  to  the  first  position.  Fig.  19. 

This  exercise  is  always  found  to  he  one 
of  the  most  difficult  on  the  trapeze,  and 
requires  the  greatest  care  in  its  execution ; 
the  pause  in  the  horizontal  line  should 
never  exceed  a  few  seconds.  The  variation 
of  this  exercise  sometimes  performed,  of 
passing  from  the  horizontal  line  over  the 
har,  should  never  be  allowed,  as  it  is  in 
the  highest  degree  dangerous. 

13.  Swinging  on  the  Trapeze. 

It  is  scarcely  possible  to  give  any  definite  directions  for  the  performance 
of  evolutions  upon  the  trapeze  at  full  swing.  No  amount  of  written 
description  can  convey  a  correct  idea  of  the  manner  in  which  they  are 
executed ;  they  are  the  result  of  experience,  much  caution  being  exercised 
at  first,  and  gradually  feeling  the  way,  as  confidence  increases,  to  more 
venturesome  attempts  which  unite  grace  of  action  with  daring  in  conception. 

It  is  the  pride  of  every  trapeze  performer  to  attempt  some  sensational 
feat  which  appears  more  or  less  original  either  in  plan  or  execution,  but  all 
such  acts,  or  nearly  all,  are  combinations  or  new  applications  of  sunple 
exercises. 

The  only  way  to  gain  confidence  and  proficiency  is  to  practise  the  exercises, 
first  with  the  trapeze-bar  as  stationary  as  circumstances  permit,  repeating 
them  with  a  slight  swinging  motion,  and  persevering  until  their  perform- 
ance is  successful  at  full  swing. 

There  are  various  ways  of  obtaining  a  full  swing ;  for  learners,  perhaps 
the  easiest  and  safest  way  is  to  sit  upon  the  bar,  grasping  the  ropes,  and 
using  the  trapeze  as  an  ordinary  swing  until  sufficient  sweep  has  been 
attained. 

A  quicker  method  is  to  hold  the  bar  firmly  with  both  hands,  the  left  leg 
bent  at  the  knee  over  the  bar,  the  body  and  right  leg  hanging  free.  When 
the  swing  forwards  is  nearly  complete  sweep  the  right  log  upwards,  and 
quickly  straighten  the  body;  at  the  completion  of  the  backward  swing, 
sweep  the  right  leg  backwards  as  far  as  possible  and  again  straighten  the 
body.    In  a  few  oscillations  almost  a  semicircular  swing  will  be  attained. 


THE    TRAPEZE.  105 

Another  method^  apparently  requiring  greater  nerve,  but  really  not  very 
difficult,  is  to  straddle  the  bar,  left  leg  foremost,  the  body  upright,  the 
legs  straight  down,  and  holding  the  bar  with  both  hands  firmly ;  just  before 
the  end  of  the  forward  swing  make  a  somersault  backwards,  the  swing  of 
the  body  will  add  momentum  to  the  swing;  just  before  the  end  of  the  back, 
ward  swing,  make  a  somersault  forwards,  and  the  momentum  will  be  further 
increased.  The  main  difficulty  in  this  feat  is  in  resuming  and  retaining  an 
upright  position  after  each  somersault,  but  practice  will  achieve  it. 

It  will  soon  be  discovered  that  many  exercises  which  require  severe 
muscular  strain  when  attempted  on  the  horizontal  bar,  will  become  com- 
paratively easy  when  performed  on  the  swinging  trapeze,  by  utilizing  the 
motion  of  the  swing  at  the  right  moment. 

It  will  also  be  found  that,  when  the  swing  motion  is  sufficient  to  bring 
the  suspending  ropes  into  nearly  or  quite  a  horizontal  position,  at  the  point 
where  the  rise  is  at  its  full,  and  before  the  down  sweep  commences,  there  is 
a  moment  of  perfect  equipoise,  almost  instantaneous,  of  course,  but  quite 
long  enough  to  allow  of  a  change  or  reversal  of  the  grasp  on  the  bar,  a  new 
adjustment  of  position,  or  a  change  of  hold  from  the  bar  to  the  ropes. 

The  strain  is  greatest  at  the  lowest  or  centre-point  of  the  swing,  and 
gradually  decreases  as  the  upward  rise  progresses;  the  upward  sweep  is, 
therefore,  the  most  propitious  for  change  of  posture,  to  be  completed  at  or 
before  the  point  of  equipoise  already  referred  to,  and  a  firm  grip  and  stable 
balance  acquired  before  the  downward  sweep  commences,  during  which  the 
physical  strain  is  steadily  on  the  increase. 

COMBIKATIONS. 

The  following  exercises  should  be  combined  and  executed  without  pause, 
as  soon  as  the  separate  exercises  composing  them  can  be  performed  singly. 

COMBINATIONS  OF  TWO  EXErwCISES. 

Nos.    2  and  5.    To  rise  by  both  ropes — to  turn  round  the  ropes,  right  and 

left. 
Nos.    4  and  5.    To  rise  by  the  front  lift — to  turn  round  the  ropes,  right  and 

left. 
Nos.    6  and  8.    To  turn  round  the  bar  forwards— to  turn  round  the  bar, 

backwards,  and  return. 


106  THE    TRAPEZE. 


Nos.  6  and  10.    To  turn  round  the  bar  forwards — to  rise  above  the  bar,  both 

hands  at  once. 
Nos.  6  and  11.    To  turn  round  the  bar  forwards — to  turn  under  the  bar  on 

one  hand. 
Nos.  6  and  12.    To  turn  round  the  bar  forwards — to  form  the  straight  line. 
Nos.  8  and  10.    To  turn  round  the  bar  backwards,  and  return — to  rise  above 

the  bar,  both  hands  at  once. 
Nos.  8  and  11.    To  turn  round  the  bar  backwards,  and  return — to  turn 

under  the  bar  on  one  hand. 
Nos.  8  and  12.    To  turn  round  the  bar  backwards,  and  return— to  form  the. 

straight  hne. 
Nos.  10  and  11.  To  rise  above  the  bar  both  hands  at  once— to  turn  under 

the  bar  on  one  hand. 
Nos.  10  and  12.  To  rise  above  the  bar  both  hands  at  once — to  form  the 

straight  luie. 

COMBINATIONS  OF  THREE  EXERCISES. 

Nos.     6,  8  and  10.    To  turn  round  the  bar  forwards — to  turn  round  the  bar 

backwards  and  return — to  rise  above  the  bar,  both 

hands  at  once. 
Nos.    6,  10  and  11.    To  turn  round  the  bar  forwards — to  rise  above  the  bar, 

both  hands  at  once — to  turn  under  the  bar  on  one 

hand. 
Nos.    6, 10  and  12.    To  turn  round  the  bar  forwards — to  rise  above  the  bar, 

both  hands  at  once — to  form  the  straight  line. 
Nos.    6, 11  and  12.    To  turn  round  the  bar  forwards — to  turn  under  the  bar 

on  one  hand — to  form  the  straight  line. 
Nos.    10,  8  and  12.    To  rise  above  the  bar,  both  hands  at  once— to  turn 

round  the  bar  backwards,  and  return — to  form  the 

straight  line. 
Nos.    8,  11  and  12.    To  turn  round  the  bar  backwards  and  return— to  turn 

on  one  hand  under  the  bar — to  form  the  straight 

line. 
Nos.    8,  J 1  and  10.    To  turn  round  the  bar  backwards  and  return— to  turn 

under  the  bar  on  one  hand — to  rise  above  the  bar, 

both  hands  at  once. 


THE    TRAPEZE.  107 


COMBINATIONS   OF  FOUR  EXERCISES. 

Nos.  6;  8  10  and  11.  To  turn  round  the  bar  forwards — to  turn  round  the 
bar  backwards,  and  return — to  rise  above  the  bar, 
both  hands  at  once — to  turn  under  the  bar  on  one 
hand. 

Nos.  6, 10,  11  and  12.  To  turn  round  the  bar  forwards— to  rise  above  the 
bar,  both  hands  at  once— to  turn  under  the  bar  on 
one  hand — to  form  the  straight  hne. 

Nos.  8,  10,  6  and  12.  To  turn  round  the  bar  backwards,  and  return — to 
rise  above  the  bar,  both  hands  at  once — to  turn 
round  the  bar  forwards — to  form  the  straight  hne. 

Nos.  10;  8,  11  and  6.  To  rise  above  the  bar,  both  hands  at  once — to  turn 
round  the  bar  backwards,  and  return — to  turn 
under  the  bar  on  one  hand — to  turn  round  the  bar 
forwards. 


COMBINATIONS   OF  FIVE  EXERCISES. 

Nos.  6,  8,  10,  11  and  12.     To  turn  round  the  bar  forwards — to  turn  round 

the  bar  backwards,  and  return — to  rise  above 
the  bar,  both  hand  at  once — to  turn  under  the 
bar  on  one  hand — to  form  the  straight  line. 

Nos.  8,  10,  6, 11  and  12.    To  turn  round  the  bar  backwards,  and  return — to 

rise  above  the  bar,  both  hands  at  once — to  turn 
round  the  bar  forwards — to  turn  under  the  bar 
on  one  hand — to  form  the  straight  line. 

Nos.  10,  8,  6,  10  and  12.    To  rise  above  the  bar,  both  hands  at  once — to 

turn  round  the  bar  backwards,  and  return — 
to  turn  round  the  bar  forwards — to  rise  above 
the  bar,  both  hands  at  once— to  form  the 
straight  line. 


THE     INOLII^ED     LADDER. 


Fig.  1. 


It  may  seem  unnecessary  to  teach,  by  formal  instructions,  exercises  so 
simple  as  many  of  those  directed  in  the  text  to  be  performed  on  this  ma- 
chine, but  their  usefulness  may  be  readily  proved.  Let  a  dozen  men  be 
taken  at  hazard  and  desired  to  climb  a  ladder  at  any  given  incline,  and  it 
will  be  found  that  scarcely  two  will  do  so  in  the  same  manner,  scarcely  two 
will  maintain  throughout  the  ascent  the  position  and  action  with  which  they 
began,  while  uncertainty,  hesitation,  and  insecurity  will  more  or  less  mark 
the  efforts  of  all.  The  practised  gymnast,  on  the  contrary,  will  mount  it  as 
surely  and  as  rapidly  as  if  it  were  a  staircase,  in  any  one  of  a  dozen  differ- 
ent ways,  and  with  far  less  strain  on  the  ladder  than  an  unpractised  person. 

The  ladder  should  be  carefully  constructed,  and  the  materials  well 
selected.  The  width  of  the  ladder  between  the  supports  should  be  1 4  or  15 
inches,  and  the  spars  9  inches  apart. 

The  inclination  of  the  ladder  should  be  frequently 
varied. 

Apart  from  the  mechanical  facilities  gained  in  the  use 
of  the  ladder,  the  exercises  afford  excellent  training  in 
uniformity  of  motion,  precision,  and  accuracy  in  measure- 
ment of  distances — all  of  which  are  essential  to  gymnastic 
perfection. 

1.  Right  Hand  Leading.—  Position  of  attention  at  the 
foot  of  the  ladder,  the  toes  touching  it. 

1.  Eaise  the  right  hand  and  grasp  the  spar  nearest 
the  reach,  the  left  followmg,  the  fingers  and  thumbs  to- 
gether ;  lift  the  right  foot  from  the  ground,  and  place  it 
on  the  first  spar,  the  left  following,  resting  on  the  front  of 
the  foot,  the  toes  pointed  to  the  front,  the  column  of  the 
body  and  lower  hmbs  straight  but  unconstrained,  and  inclined  towards  the 
line  of  the  ladder,  the  head  erect,  the  eyes  directed  to  the  reach  of  the 
hands  (Fig.  1). 

108 


THE    INCLINED    LADDER. 


109 


2.  Eaise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  following,  lift  the  right 
foot  to  the  next  spar,  straighten  the  right  knee,  and  lift  the  left  foot  to  the 
next  spar,    llepcat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  foot  down  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  follow- 
ing, slip  the  right  hand  down  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  following.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  hand  leading. 

This  exercise  to  he  repeated  with  the  hands  Ughtly  grasping  the  sides 
of  the  ladder. 

2.  Right  Side  Leading.— Po^itiow  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar  and  at  the  same  time  lift  the 


Fig.  2. 


right  foot  to  the  next  spar  (Fig.  2),  straighten  the  right 
knee  and  lift  the  left  hand  and  left  foot  together  to  the 
same  spar.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  hand  down  to  the  next 
spar,  and  at  the  same  time  slip  the  right  foot  down  to  the 
next  spar,  the  left  hand  and  left  foot  following.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  he  repeated  with  the  left  side  leading. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  hands  lightly 
grasping  the  sides  of  the  ladder. 

3.  Right  and  Left  ^i^Q.-Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar  and  at  the 
same  time  hft  the  right  foot  to  the  next  spar,  as  in 
Fig.  2 ;  straighten  the  right  knee  and  at  the  same  time 
raise  the  left  hand  to  the  spar  above  that  grasped  by 

the  right,  and  lift  the  left  foot  to  the  spar  above  that  occupied  by  the  right. 
Repeat  the  step,  the  leading  hand  and  foot  always  passing  the  spars  occu- 
pied by  the  supporting  hand  and  foot. 

In  descending,  pass  the  leading  hand  down  to  the  spar  below  that 
grasped  by  the  supporting  hand,  and  the  leading  foot  to  the  spar  below 
that  occupied  by  the  supporting  foot.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  hands  hghtly  grasping  the  sides 
of  the  ladder. 

4.  Right  and  Left,  Hand  and  'E ooi.— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 


110 


THE    INCLINED    LADDER. 


Fig.  3. 


T.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Eaise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar  and  at  the  same  time  lift  the 
left  foot  to  the  next  spar  (Fig.  3) ;  straighten  the  left  knee 
and  at  the  same  time  raise  the  left  hand  to  the  spar  above 
that  grasped  by  the  right,  and  lift  the  right  foot  to  the 
spar  above  that  occupied  by  the  left.  Repeat  the  step, 
the  leading  hand  and  foot  always  passing  the  spars  occu- 
pied by  the  supporting  hand  and  foot. 

tn  descending,  pass  the  leading  hand  to  the  spar  below 
that  grasped  by  the  supporting  hand,  and  the  leading 
foot  to  the  spar  below  that  occupied  by  the  supporting 
foot.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  hands  lightly 
grasping  the  sides  of  the  ladder. 


6.  Both  Hands  at  OTi.ce.— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  first  exercise. 

2.  Raise  both  hands  to  the  next  spar;  lift  the  right 
foot  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  following.    Repeat. 

In  descending,   slip  the  right  foot  down  to  the   next 
following;     slip  both  hands    down   to   the   next   spar. 
Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  hands  lightly 
grasping  the  sides  of  the  ladder. 

6.  With  One  Kond..— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 
1.  Place  the  left  hand  upon  the  hip  joint,  the  fingers 


spai 


to  the  front,  the  thumb  to  the  rear; 


raise  the  right  hand 


and  grasp  the  spar  nearest  the  reach,  lift  the  left  foot  and 
place  it  on  the  first  spar,  the  right  following  (Fig.  4). 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  lift  the  left 
foot  to  the  next  spar,  straighten  the  left  knee,  elon- 
gate the  trunk,  and  lift  the  right  foot  to  the  same  spar. 
Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  left  foot  down  to  the  next  spar, 
the  right  following,  slip  the  right  hand  down  to  the  next  spar. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  hand.  i 


Repeat. 


THE    INCLINED    LADDER. 


Ill 


Fig.  5. 


This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  hand  lightly  grasping  the  side 
of  the  ladder. 

7.  With  the  Feet  OnXy.— Position  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  Place  both  hands  on  the  hip  joints,  lift  the  right 
foot  from  the  ground  and  place  it  on  the  first  spar,  the 
left  following,  the  feet  advanced  on  the  spar  so  that 
the  rest  is  nearly  at  the  heel,  and  the  front  of  the  leg 
nearly  touching  the  spars ;  the  column  of  the  body  in- 
clined to  the  front,  the  head  in  the  same  line  and  the 
eyes  directed  to  the  front. 

2.  Lift  the  left  foot  to  the  second  spar  (Fig.  5), 
straighten  the  left  leg  and  at  the  same  time  lift  the 
right  foot  to  the  same  spar.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  left  foot  down  to  the  next 
spar,  the  right  following.    Repeat. 

8.  Right  Hand  Leading,  Tinder  the  Ladder.— Po5t- 

tion  of  attention,  under  the  ladder. 

1.  Raise  the  right  hand  and  grasp  the  spar  nearest 
left  following,  the  fingers  and  thumb  together ;  lift  the  right 
foot  from  the  ground  and  place  it  on  the  nearest 
spar,  the  left  following,  straighten  the  knees,  elon- 
gate the  trunk,  the  arms  bent  at  the  half  reach, 
the  chest  advanced,  the  body  inclined  in  the  line  of, 
and  close  to,  the  ladder,  the  head  back,  the  eyes 
directed  to  the  reach  of  the  hands  (Fig.  6). 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  the 
left  following;  lift  the  right  foot  to  the  next  spar, 
the  left  following,  straighten  the  knees  and  elongate 
the  trunk.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  foot  down  to  the 
next  spar,  the  left  following ;  slip  the  right  hand 
down  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  following.     Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  hand 
leading. 
9.  Right  Side  Leading,  Under  the  Ladder.-- Position  as  in  eighth  exercise. 


the  reach,  the  i 
Fig.  6 


112 


THE    INCLINED    LADDEB, 


Fig.  7. 


1.  As  in  eighth  exercise. 

2.  Eaise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  and  at  the  same  time  hft  the 
right  foot  to  the  next  spar  (Fig.  7),  the  left  hand 
and  foot  following  on  the  left.     Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  hand  down  to 
the  next  spar,  and  at  the  same  time  slip  the 
right  foot  down  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  hand 
and  left  foot  following  together  to  the  same 
spars.     Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left 
side  leading. 

10.  Right  and  Left  Side,  Under  the  Ladder.— 

Position  as  in  eighth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  eighth  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  and 
at  the  same  time  lift  the  right  foot  to  the  next 
spar,  as  in  Fig.  7 ;  straighten  the  right  knee  and 
at  the  same  time  raise  the  left  hand  to  the  spar  above  that  grasped  by  the 
right,  and  lift  the  left  foot  to  the  spar  above  that 
occupied  by  the  right.    Repeat  the  step,  the  lead- 
ing hand  and  foot  always  passing  the  supporting 
hand  and  foot. 

In  descending,  pass  the  leading  hand  down  to 
the  spar  below  that  grasped  by  the  supporting 
hand,  and  the  leading  foot  to  the  spar  below  that 
occupied  by  the  supporting  foot.    Repeat. 

11.  Hand  and  Foot,  Tinder  the  Ladder.— Posziiow 

as  in  eighth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  eighth  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar  and  at 
the  same  time  lift  the  left  foot  to  the  next  spar 
(Fig.  8),  straighten  the  left  knee  and  elongate  the 
trunk,  and  at  the  same  time  raise  the  left  hand 
to  the  spar  above  that  grasped  by  the  right,  and  the  right  fciot  to  the 
spar  above  that  occupied  by  the  left.    Repeat  the  step,  the  leading  hand 


THE    INCLINED    LADDEB 


113 


and  foot  always  passing  the  spars  occupied  by  tlie  supporting  hand  and 
foot. 

In  descending;  slip  the  leading  hand  down  to  the  spar  below  that  grasped 
by  the  supporting  hand,  and  the  leading  foot  to  the  spar  below  that  occu- 
pied by  the  supporting  foot.    Repeat. 

12.  Both  Hands  at  Once,  Under  the  Ladder.— PosiYiow  as  in  eighth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  eighth  exercise. 

2.  Raise  both  hands  to  the  next  spar  and  lift  both  feet  to  the  next  spar, 
straighten  the  knees  and  elongate  the  trunk.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  pass  both  feet  down  to  the  next  spar,  and  pass  both 
hands  down  to  the  next  spar.    Repeat. 

13.  Right  Hand  Leading,  Under  the  Ladder,  by  the  Si^es—Fositim  as  in 
eighth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  eighth  exercise,  except  that  the  hands 
grasp  the  sides  of  the  ladder,  right  and  left,  instead 
of  the  spars  (Fig.  9). 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  reach,  the  left 
following  on  the  left ;  lift  the  right  foot  to  the  next 
spar,  the  left  following,  straighten  the  knees  and 
elongate  the  trunk.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  foot  down  to  the 
next  spar,  the  left  following ;  slip  the  right  hand 


Fig.  9. 


down  to  the  rest,  the  left 


following 


on  the  left. 


Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  hand 
leading. 

14.  Right  Side  Leading,  Under  the  Ladder,  by  the 

Sides.— Po5iYww  as  in  eighth  exercise. 
As  in  thirteenth  exercise. 

Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  reach,  and  at  the  same  time  lift  the  right 
foot  Vo  the  next  spar,  the  left  hand  and  foot  following  on  the  left.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  hand  down  to  the  rest,  and  at  the  same 
time  ^lip  the  right  foot  down  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  hand  and  left  foot 
following  on  the  left.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  side  leading. 


114 


THE    INCLINED    LADDEB 


15.  Right  and  Left  Side,  Tinder  the  Ladder,  by  the  Sides— Position  as  in 
eighth  exercise. 

1 .  As  in  thirteenth  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  reach,  and  at  the  same  time  lift  the  right 
foot  to  the  next  spar;  straighten  the  right  knee,  and  at  the  same  time  raise 
the  left  hand  to  the  reach  and  lift  the  left  foot  to  the  spar  above  that  occu- 
pied by  the  right.  Repeat  the  step,  the  leading  hand  and  foot  always 
passing  the  supporting  hand  and  foot. 

In  descending,  pass  the  leading  hand  down  to  the  rest,  and  at  the  same 
time  slip  the  leading  foot  down  to  the  spar  below  that  occupied  by  the 
supporting  foot.    Repeat. 

16.  Hand  and  Foot,  Tinder  the  Ladder,  by  the  Sides.— Position  as  in  eighth 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  thirteenth  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  reach,  and  at  the  same  time  lift  the  left 
foot  to  the  next  spar ;  straighten  the  left  knee  and  elongate  the  trunk,  and 
at  the  same  time  raise  the  left  hand  to  the  reach  and  the  right  foot  to  the 
spar  above  that  occupied  by  the  right.  Repeat  the  step,  the  leading  hand 
and  foot  always  passing  the  supporting  hand  and  foot. 

In  descending,  pass  the  leading  hand  down  to 
the  rest,  and  at  the  same  time  slip  the  leading  foot 
down  to  the  spar  below  that  occupied  by  the  sup- 
porting foot.    Repeat. 

17.  Both  Hands  at  Once,  Tinder  the  Ladder,  by 
the  Sides.— Position  as  in  eighth  exercise. 

1 .  As  in  thirteenth  exercise. 

2.  Raise  both  hands  to  the  reach,  lift  both  feet 
to  the  next  spar,  straighten  the  knees  and  elongate 
the  trunk.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  pass  both  feet  down  to  the  next 
spar,  slip  both  hands  down  to  the  rest.    Repeat. 

18.  Right  Hand  Leading,  by  Spars  and  Sides.— 
Position  as  in  eighth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  eighth  exercise,  except  that  the  leading  hand  grasps  the  spar, 
the  supporting  hand  grasps  the  side  of  the  ladder  (Fig.  lOJ. 


Fig.  10. 


THE    INCLINED    LADDER.  115 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  raise  the  left  hand  the  same 
distance  on  the  side ;  lift  the  right  foot  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  following^ 
straighten  the  knees  and  elongate  the  trunk.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  foot  down  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  follow- 
ing, sUp  the  light  hand  down  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  following  on  the 
side,  the  same  distance.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  he  repeated  with  the  left  hand  leading. 

19.  Right  Side  Leading,  by  Spars  and  ^idiQz— Position  as  in  eighth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  and  at  the  same  time  hft  the 
right  foot  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  hand  and  left  foot  following  the  same 
distance.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  hand  down  to  the  next  spar  and  at  the 
same  time  slip  the  right  foot  down  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  hand  and  left 
foot  following  the  same  distance.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  side  leading. 

20.  Right  and  Left  Side,  by  Spars  and  Si^es— Position  as  in  eighth 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  and  at  the  same  time  lift  the 
right  foot  to  the  next  spar ;  straighten  the  right  knee  and  at  the  same  time 
raise  the  left  hand  the  distance  of  the  step  above  the  right  and  the  left  foot 
to  the  spar  above  that  occupied  by  the  right.  Repeat  the  step,  the  leading 
hand  and  foot  always  passing  the  supporting  hand  and  foot. 

In  descending,  slip  the  leading  hand  and  foot  down  the  distance  of  the 
step  below  the  supporting  hand  and  foot.    Repeat. 

21.  Hand  and  Foot,  by  Spars  and  SiSlbs.— Position  as  in  eighth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  and  at  the  same  time  lift  the 
left  foot  to  the  next  spar ;  raise  the  left  hand  the  distance  of  the  step  above 
the  right,  and  the  right  foot  to  the  spar  above  that  occupied  by  the  left. 
Repeat  the  step,  the  leading  hand  and  foot  always  passing  the  supporting 
hand  and  foot. 

In  descending,  slip  the  leading  hand  and  foot  down  the  distance  of  the 
step  below  the  supporting  hand  and  foot.    Repeat. 


110 


TBE    INCLINED    LADDER. 


Fig.  11. 


22.  Both  Hands  at  Once,  by  Spars  and  Sides.— Po5^^^o;^  as  in  eighth 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  eighteenth  exercise. 

2.  Eaise  both  hands  the  distance  of  the  step,  the  right  grasping  the  next 
spar,  the  left  grasping  the  side ;  lift  both  feet  to  the  next  spar,  straighten 
the  knees  and  elongate  the  trunk.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  both  hands  down  the  distance  of  the  step,  pass  both 
feet  down  to  the  next  spar.     Repeat. 

23.  Right  Hand  Leading,  by  the  Sides  OiAy.— Position  as  in  seventh 
exercise. 

1 .  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  reach  and  grasp  the  side  of  the  ladder, 
the  left  following  on  the  left,  the  fingers  and  thumbs  meeting ;  bend  the 
arms  to  the  half  reach,  lifting  the  feet  from  the 
ground,  the  legs  straight  and  together,  the  toes 
pointed  downwards,  the  trunk  of  the  body  upright, 
the  neck  free,  the  head  held  back,  the  eyes  directed 
to  the  reach  of  the  hands  (Fig.  11). 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  reach,  the  left 
following  on  the  left ;  bend  the  arms  to  the  half 
reach,  retaining  the  trunk  and  lower  limbs  in 
position.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  hand  down  to  the 
rest,  the  left  following  on  the  left.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  hand 
leading. 

24.  Hand  Over  Hand,  by  the  Sides  Only .—Po5?Yww 
as  in  eighth  exercise. 

1 .  As  in  twenty-second  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  reach,  bend  the  right  arm  and  on  the  in- 
stant raise  the  left  hand  to  the  reach,  beyond  the  right.  Repeat,  the  lead- 
ing hand  always  passing  beyond  the  level  of  the  supporting  hand. 

In  descending,  slip  the  leading  hand  down  to  the  rest,  below  the  sup- 
porting hand.    Repeat. 

25.  Both  Hands  at  Once,  by  the  Sides  Only.— Position  as  in  eighth  exercise. 
^    1.  As  in  twenty-second  exercise. 


THE    INCLINED    LADDER. 


117 


2.  Shoot  up  botli  hands  to  the  reach,  retainmg  the  arms  bent,  and  the 
trunk  and  lower  hmbs  in  ijosition.     Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  both  hands  down  to  the  reach.    Repeat. 

26.  Right  Hand  Leading,  by  the  Spars  (^vly.— Position  as  in  eighth 
exercise. 

1.  Raise  the  right  hand  and  grasp  the  spar  nearest  the  reach,  the  left 


Fig.  12. 


the  fingers  and  thumbs  together;  bend  tho 
arms  to  the  half  reach,  lifting  the  feet  from  the  ground, 
the  trunk  and  lower  limbs  as  in  twenty-third  exerciso 
(Fig.  12). 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  fol- 
lowing,  bend  the  arms  to  the  half  reach,  retaining  the 
trunk  and  lower  limbs  in  position.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  hand  down  to  the  next 
spar^  the  left  following.     Repeat. 

exercise    to   be   repeated  with 


the  left  hand 


This 
leading. 

27.  Hand  Over  Hand,  by  the  Spars  (ivXy— Position  as 
in  eighth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  twenty-fifth  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  bend  the 
right  arm  and  on  the  instant  rai§e  the  left  hand  to  the 

spar  above  that  grasped  by  the  right.    Repeat,  the  leading  hand  always 
passing  the  spar  grasped  by  the  supporting  hand. 

In  descending,  slip  the  leading  hand  down  to  the  spar  below  that 
grasped  by  the  supporting  hand.    Repeat. 

28.  Both  Hands  at  Once,  by  the  Spars  Only.— PoseYiow  as  in  eighth  exercise. 

1.  As  in  twenty-fifth  exercise. 

2.  Shoot  up  both  hands  to  the  next  spar,  retaining  the  arms  bent,  and 
the  trunk  and  lower  hmbs  in  position.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  both  hands  down  to  the  next  spar.    Repeat. 

29.  Right  Hand  Leading,  by  Spars  and  Sides  Ovlj— Position  as  in  eighth 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  twenty -third  exercise,  except  that  the  right  hand  grasps  the 
spar,  the  left  hand  grasps  the  side  of  the  ladder,  opposite  the  right. 


118 


THE    INCLINED    LADDER. 


2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  following  the  same 
distance  on  the  side.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  hand  down  to  the  next  spar,  the  left  follow- 
ing the  same  distance  on  the  side.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  hand  leading  and  grasping 
the  spar,  the  right  hand  on  the  side. 

30.  Hand  Over  Hand,  by  Spars  and  Sides  QT^y.—Fosition  as  in  eighth 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  twenty-ninth  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar,  bend  the  right  arm  and  on  the 
instant  raise  the  left  hand  to  the  reach  beyond  the  right.  Repeat,  the 
leading  hand  always  passing  the  supporting  hand. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  hand  down  to  the  next  spar  below  the  left, 
fihp  the  left  down  below  the  right.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  I'cpeated,  the  left  hand  grasping  the  spar,  the  right 
hand  on  the  side. 

31.  Both  Hands  at  Once,  by  Spars  and  Sides  Only —Position  as  in  eighth 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  twenty-ninth  exercise. 

2.  Shoot  up  both  hands  the  distance  of  the  step  (the 
distance  between  the  spars),  the  right  grasping  the  next 
spar,  the  left  grasping  the  side  of  the  ladder,  opposite 
the  right.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  slip  both  hands  down  the  distance  of 
the  step,  as  in  the  ascent.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated,  the  left  hand  grasping 
the  spar,  the  right  hand  on  the  side. 

32.  Left  Hand  Leading,  Sideways.— Posi^iow  of  atten- 
tion,  the  ladder  in  profile  on  the  left. 

1.  Raise  the  right  hand  and,  passing  it  above  the  lad- 
der, grasp  the  spar  nearest  the  reach,  the  fingers  and 
thumb  meeting,  raise  the  left  hand  and,  passing  it  under 
the  ladder,  grasp  the  spar  above  that  grasped  by  the 
right;  bend  the  arms  and  lift  both  feet  from  the  ground,  the  legs  straight 
and  together,  the  toes  pointed  downwards,  the  trunk  of  the  body  upright, 


Fig.  13. 


THE    INCLINED    LADDER 


119 


Fig.  14. 


the  neck  free,  the  head  shghtly  held  back,  the  eyes  directed  to  the  reach 
of  the  hands  (Fig.  13). 

2.  Raise  the  left  hand  to  the  next  spar,  raise  the  right  hand  to  the  next 
spar.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  pass  the  right  hand  down  to  the  next  spar,  pass  the  left 
hand  down  to  the  next  spar.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  right  hand  leading. 

33.  Hand  Over  Hand,  Sideways.— Position  as  in  thirty-second  exercise. 

1.  As  in  thirty-second  exercise. 

2.  Raise  the  right  hand  to  the  spar  above  that  grasped  by  the  left,  ele- 
vate the  body  and  raise  the  left  hand  to  the  spar 
above  that  grasped  by  the  right.    Repeat. 

In  descending,  pass  the  leading  hand  down  to 
the  spar  below  that  grasped  by  the  supporting  hand. 
Repeat. 

34.  Right  Hand  Leading,  Sideways,  Legs  Up.— 

Position  as  in  thirty-second  exercise. 

1.  As  in  thirty-second  exercise,  except  that  in 
lifting  the  feet  from  the  ground  they  are  to  be  ex- 
tended to  the  front  horizontally,  the  legs  straight 
and  together,  the  toes  pointed  to  the  front  (Fig.  14). 

2.  As  in  thirty-second  exercise,  retaining  the 
lower  limbs  in  position.    Repeat. 

Descend  as  in  thirty-second  exercise. 
This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  hand  leading. 

35.  Hand  Over  Hand,  Sideways,  Legs  JJ'p.— Position  as  in  thirty-second 
exercise. 

1.  As  in  thirty -fourth  exercise. 

2.  As  in  twenty-fifth  exercise,  retaining  the  lower  limbs  in  position. 
Repeat. 

Descend  as  in  thirty-third  exercise. 

36.  Right  Hand  Leading,  Hands  Only,  Above  the  Ladder.— Position  as 
in  first  exercise. 

1.  Raise  both  hands  and  grasp  the  spar  nearest  the  reach,  the  fingers 
and  thumb  meeting ;  press  strongly  from  the  hands,  and  straightening  the 


120 


THE    INCLINED    LAD  DEB, 


Fig.  15. 


arms,  lift  both  feet  from  the  ground  and  pass  them  right  and  left  outside 
the  ladder,  the  inside  of  the  foot  lightly  pressing 
against  the  supports,  the  legs  straight,  the  toes 
pointed  downwards,  the  chest  advanced,  the  head 
shghtly  bent  back  (Fig.  15). 

2.  Kaise  the  right  hand  to  the  next  spar, 
straighten  the  right  arm,  raise  the  left  hand  to  the 
same  spar.    Kepeat. 

In  descending,  slip  the  right  hand  down  to  thp 
next  spar,  the  left  following.    Repeat. 

This  exercise  to  be  repeated  with  the  left  hand 
leading. 

37.  Hand  Over  Hand,  Hands  Only,  Above  the 
Ladder.— PostYion  as  in  first  exercise. 

1.  As  in  thirty-sixth  exercise. 

2.  Raise    the    right  hand  to  the   next    spar, 

straighten  the  right  arm  and  on  the  instant  raise  the  left  hand  to  the  spar 
above  that  grasped  by  the  right.  Repeat  the  step,  the  leading  hand  alwajs 
passing  the  spar  grasped  by  the  supporting  hand. 

In  descending,  slip  the  leading  hand  down  to  the  spar  below  that 
grasped  by  the  supporting  hand.     Repeat. 

38.  To  Descend  Rapidly  Above  the  Ladder. 

Pass  the  right  leg  over  the  side  of  the  ladder,  the  knee  bent,  the  foreleg 
pendent,  the  left  leg  following  on  the  left.  Pass  the  right  hand  to  the  out- 
side of  the  ladder,  grasping  the  support  on  the  underside,  the  fingers  and 
thumb  together,  the  left  hand  following  on  the  left.  Regulate  the  rate  of 
descent  by  the  pressure  of  the  hands. 


Dick  &  Fitzgerald. 

PUBLISHERS,  NEW  YORK. 

POST  OFFICE  BOX   2973. 


%*The  Publishers,  upon  receipt  of  the  Price,  will  send  any  of  the 
following  books  by  mail,  POSTAGE  PAID,  to  any  part  of  the 
Ultited.  States.  In  ordering  books,  the  full  name,  post  office. 
County  and  State  should  be  plainly  written. 


Dick's  Games  of  Patience  ;  or,  Solitaire  with  Cards.  New  edition  with 
twenty  new  Games  and  seventeen  new  illustrations  added.  Now  containing  Sixty- 
three  Games.  Illustrated  with  Fifty  explanatory  full-page  Tableaux.  This  treatise 
on  Solitaire,  a  pastime  which  is  steadily  gaining  in  popularity,  embraces  a  number  of 
new  and  original  Games,  and  all  the  Games  of  Patience  at  present  in  favor  with  the 
most  experienced  players.  Each  game  is  carefully  and  lucidly  described,  with  the 
distinctive  rules  to  be  observed  and  hints  as  to  the  best  means  of  success  in  play. 
The  Tableaux  furnish  efficient  aid  in  rendering  the  disposition  of  the  cards  necessary 
to  each  game  plain  and  easily  comprehensible.  The  difficulty  usually  attending 
descriptions  of  intricate  games  is  reduced,  as  far  as  possible,  by  precision  in  method 
and  terseness  of  expression  in  the  text,  and  the  illustrations  serve  to  dispel  any  possi- 
ble ambiguity  that  might  be  unavoidable  without  their  aid.  The  work  is  attractive 
in  style  and  elegant  in  execution,  and  will  prove  an  interesting  companion  for  many 

a  solitary  hour.    Quarto.    Illustrated.    Paper  cover 75  gts. 

Cloth $1.00 

The  Debater,  Chairman's  Assistant,  and  Rules  of  Order.     A  manual 

for  Instruction  and  Reference  in  all  matters  pertaining  to  the  management  of  Public 
Meetings  according  to  Parliamentary  usages.    It  comprises  : 


Jlota  to  Form  and  Conduct  all  kinds  of  Asso- 
ciatums  and  Clubx  ; 

How  to  Organize  and  Arrange  Public  Meet- 
ings, Celebrations,  Dinners,  Picnics  and 
Conventions  ; 

Forms  for  Constitutions  of  Lyceums  or  Insti- 
tutes, Literary  and  other  Societies  ; 

Tlie  Powers  and  Duties  of  Officers,  with  Forms 
for  Treasurer^ ,  Secretari(fs' ,  and  other  Offi- 
cial Reports; 

TheFormaiion  and  Duties  of  Committees  : 


Rules  of  Order  and  Order  of  Business,  with 
Mode  of  Procedure  in  all  cotes: 

How  to  Draft  Resolutions  and  other  Written 
Business; 

A  model  Debate,  introducing  the  greatest  pos- 
sible variety  of  points  of  order,  urith  correct 
decisions  by  the  Chairman  ; 

The  Rules  of  Order,  in  Tabular  Form,  for  in- 
stant reference  in  all  cases  ofDouf)t  that 
may  nrtxe,  enabling  a  Chairman  to  decide 
on  all  points  at  a  glance. 


The  "Work  is  divided  into  different  Sections,  for  the  purpose  of  Consecutive  Instruction 
as  well  as  Ready  Reference,  and  includes  all  Decisions  and  Rulings  up  to  the  present 

day.     Paper  covers 30  cts. 

Bound  in  board,  cloth  back 50  CtS* 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 
Dick's  Encyclopedia  of  Practical  Receipts  and  Processes.  Containing 

6,122  practical  receipts,  written  in  a  plain  and  popular  manner,  and  illustrated  with 
explanatory  wood-cuts.  Being  a  comprehensive  Book  of  Kelerence  lor  the  Merchant. 
Manufacturer,  Artisan,  Amateur  and  Housekeeper,  embracing  valuable  iulormation  in 
the  Arts,  Professions,  Trades,  Manufactures,  including  Medicine,  Pharmacy  and  Do- 
mestic Economy.  The  scope  of  this  work  is  entirely  diflerent  from  any  other  book  of 
the  kind.  Besides  being  a  complete  and  almost  indispensable  book  of  reference  for  ihe 
thousand  and  one  receipts  and  articles  needed  in  every  household,  larm.  garden,  etc., 
it  includes  clear  and  easily  understood  directions  for  the  application  of  many  of  the 
Arts  usually  acquired  only  by  long  experience,  and  so  divested  of  tecLuicalities,  or  the 
technical  terms  used  so  fully  explained. as  to  bring  the  entire  subject  within  the  compre- 
hension of  any  person  of  ordinary  intelligence.  It  would  be  difficult  to  find  any  one  of 
the  6,422  paragraphs  in  this  work  (many  of  which  contain  several  receipts)  that  is  not 
worth  at  least  the  price  of  the  book  to  the  person  desiring  to  apply  it.  A  great  number 
of  them  are  original  contributions  prepared  expressly  for  the  tncyclopedia,  or  are  to 
be  found  only  in  rare  and  costly  works.  The  iScientific  American  B&ys  :  "It  is  worthy 
of  a  place  in  the  library  of  any  home,  work-shop,  factory  or  laboratorj-." 

607  pages,  royal  octavo,  cloth $5.00 

Sheep 6-00 

What  Shall  We  Do  To-night?  or  Social  Amusements  for  Evening 

Parties.  This  elegant  book  affords  an  almost  inexhaustible  fund  of 
amusement  for  Evening  Parties,  Social  Gatherings  and  all  Festival  Occasions,  ingeni- 
ously grouped  together  bo  as  to  furnish  complete  and  ever-varjing  entertainment  for 
Twenty-six  evenings.     It  embraces  all  the 


Best  Round  and  Forfeit  Games  rendered  per- 
fectly plain  by  original  examples;  a  gi( at 
variety  of  Ingenious  Puzzles,  Entertuinii  g 
Tricks  and  Innocent  Sells;  new  and  original 
Musical  and  Poetical  Pastimes,  /Startling 
Illusions  and  Mirth- Provoking  txhiiitions, 
including  complete  dtrtctions  and  text  for 


perfoi-ming  Charades.  Tableaux,  Parlor 
Panlomiines,  the  world  rK-nowned  J'utwh 
and  Judy  ;  Gal  ant y  Showx,  Shadow-panto- 
mime ;  Dramatic  Liu.l< gw.s  and  Parlor 
Theatricals,  with  a  se  ec  ion  tf  Original 
Plays,  etc.,  with  full  directions  for  render- 
ing them  effective. 


written  expressly  for  this  work.  It  is  embelli.'shed  with  over  onk  hundrkd  DESCRiprmt 
AND  EXPLANATORY  ENGRAVINGS,  and  contains  366  pages,  12mo,  extra  cloth $2-00 

Barber's  American  Book  of  Beady-Made  Speeches.   Containing  159 

original  examples  of  Humorous  and  Serious  Speeches,  suitable  for  every  possible 
occasion  where  a  speech  maybe  called  for,  together  with  appropriate  replies  to  each. 
Including : 


Presentation  Speeches, 
C<  nvivial  Speeches, 
Festival  Sp^ches, 
Addresses  of  Congratulation, 
Addresses  of  Welcome, 
Addresses  of  Compliment, 
Political  Speeihts, 


Divner  and  Supper  Speeches  for  Clubs, 

Off- Hand  Speeds  son    a  variety  of  Subjects, 

Miscellaneous  Spteches, 

Toasts  and  Sen!imtntsfor  Public  and  Private 
Entertainments, 

Preambles  and  Pesolufiors  of  Congratula- 
tion, Compliment  and  ConduUnce. 


"With  this  book  anyperson  may  prepare  himself  to  make  a  neat  little  speech  or  reply  to 
one  when  called  upon  to  do  po.    They  are  all  short,  appropriate  and  witty,  and  even 

ready  speakers  may  profit  by  them.    Paper 50  ctS, 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 75  CtS. 

Dick's  Original  Albnm  Verses  and  Acrostics.    Containing  Original 

Verses. 

For  Album  Dedication^: 


For  Autograph  Albums; 
To  Accf/mp'iny  Bouquets; 
For  Birthday  Anniversaries; 
For   Woolen.   Tin,  Crystal,  Silver   and 
Golden  Weddings; 


To  Accompany  J  hil'pcna  Forfeits; 
For  Covgratul'  tionx; 
For  Valentin's  in  General,  and  all 
Trader  and  Professions. 


It  contains  also  Two  Hundred  and  Eighteen  Original  Acrostic  Verpes,  the  initial  letten 
of  each  verse  forming  a  diflerent  Lady's  Christian  name,  the  meaning.'  and  derivation 
of  the  name  being  appended  to  each.  The  primary  object  of  this  book  is  to  furnish 
entirely  fresh  and  unhackneyed  matter  for  all  who  may  be  called  upon  to  fill  and 
adorn  a  page  in  a  Lady's  Album;  but  it  contains  also  new  and  appropriate  verses  to 
suit  Birthday,  Wedding  and  all  other  Anniversaries  and  Occasions  to  which  verses  of 

Compliment  or  Congratulation  are  applicable.    Paper  covers 60  ctS. 

Bound  in  full  cloth 75  Ctf. 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 


Dick's    Society    Letter    Writer    for    Ladies.      Containing    MORE 

THAN  FIVE  HUNDRED  entirely  Original  Letters  and  Notes,  with  appropriate 
answers,  on  all  subjects  and  occasions  incident  to  life  in  Good  Society ;  including 
Bpeciflc  instructions  in  all  the  details  of  a  well-written  letter,  and  General  Hints  for 
Conducting  Polite  Correspondence.     Edited  by  Wm.  B.  Dick. 

The  Contents  embrace  the  following  Subjects: 


Hints  on  Le'ter  Wriling 

Letters  of  Introductiin 

Answer. f  to  Letters  of  [ntroduction 

Lfttei  s  and  Notes  of  Invitation 

Forms  of  Cards 

Notes  of  Postponement 

Letters  and  Notes  Accepting  and 

Declining  Invitations 
Letter n  (f  Apology 
Letters  of  Anm^uncement 
Notes  ami  Letters  Accompanying  Gifts 
Notes  and  Lfltcrs  of  Acknowledgment 
Notes  and  Letters  ^Soliciting  Favors 
Notes  and  L  tiers  Offering  Favors 
Notes  and  Letters  Granting  or  Declin- 
ing Favors 


Notes  Soliciting  Donations 

Notes    and    Lett'-rs    Granting  or 

Refusing  Donations 
Letters  of  Congratulation 
Letters  of  Cotidohnce 
Answers  to  Letters  of  Corulolence 
Hou^eho'd  Letters  and  Nr.tes 
Forms  of  Household  Orders 
Answers  to  Household  Lettirs 
Business  Letters  and  Notes 
Shopping  by  Mail 
Forms  of  Orders 
Miscellaneous  Business  Letters 
Family  Letters 
Miscellaneous  Notes  and  Letters 


These  new  and  Original  Letters  have  been  written  expressly  for  this  work  in  an  easy 
and  elegant  style,  furnishing  excellent  models  which  fulfill  all  the  social,  formal  and 
business  conditions  that  occur  in  the  Correspondence  of  Ladies  who  move  in  refined 
society.  There  are  many  otherwise  highly  accomplished  ladies  who  experience  con- 
siderable difficnlty  in  inditing  a  good  letter,  and  Irequently  find  themselves  embarrassed 
from  a  want  of  facility  in  method  of  expression  and  proper  form;  to  them  this  work 
is  especially  adapted,  and  will  afford  them  valuable  aid  in  rendering  the  task  of  cor- 
respondence easy  and  light.    12mo.,  Cloth,  Price S1.25. 

Dick's  Mysteries  of  the  Hand ;  or,  Palmistry  made  Easy.  Trans- 
lated, Abridged  and  Arranged  from  the  French  Works  o'f  Desbarrolles,  D'Arpentigny 
and  De  Para  d'Hermes.  This  book  is  a  concise  summary  of  Fhe  elaborate  works  of  the 
above-named  authorities  on  Palmistry. 

The  various  lines  and  mounts  on  the  palm  of  the  hand,  and  the  typical  formation 
of  the  hand  and  finjjers  are  all  clearly  explained  and  illustrated  by  diagrams.  The 
meaning  to  be  deduced  from  the  greater  or  less  development  of  these  mounts  and 
lines  (each  of  which  has  its  own  Bignification),  also  from  the  length,  thickness  and 
shape  of  the  thumb  and  fingers,  and  from  the  mutual  bearing  they  exercise  on 
each  other,   is  all  distinctly  explained. 

Complete  facility  for  instant  relerence  is  insured  by  means  of  marginal  notes  by  which 
any  point  of  detail  may  be  found  and  consulted  at  a  glance. 

By  means  of  this  book  the  hitherto  occult  mystery  of  Palmistry  is  made  simple  and 
easy,  and  the  whole  Art  may  be  acquired  without  difficulty  or  delay.  It  is  emphati- 
cally Palmistry  in  a  nutshell,  and  by  its  use,  character  and  disposition  can  be  dis- 
cerned and  probable  future  destiny  foretold  with  surprising  accuracy.  Illuminated 
paper  cover 50  cts. 

Dick's  Hand-Book  of  Whist.  Containing  Pole's  and  Clay's  Rules  for 
playing  the  modern  scientific  game;  the  Club  Rules  of  Whist,  and  two  interesting 
Double  Dummy  Problems.  This  is  a  thorough  treatise  on  the  game  of  Whist,  taken 
from  "  The  American  Hoyle  "  which  is  the  standard  authority.  It  covers  all  the 
points  and  intricacies  which  arise  in  the  game;  including  the  acknowledged  code  of 
etiquette  observed  by  the  players,  with  Drayson's  remarks  on  Trumps,  their  use  and 
abuse,  and  all  the  modern  methods  of  signalling  between  partners.    Price 25  ctS. 

Kavanaugh's  New  Speeches  and  Dialoerues  for  Youn?  Children. 

Containing  easy  pieces  in  plain  language,  readily  understood  by  little  children,  and 
expressly  adapted  for  School  Exhibitions  and  Christmas  and  other  juvenile  celebra- 
tions. By  Mrs.  Russell  Kavanaugh.  This  is  an  entirely  new  series  of  Recitations  and 
Dialogues  by  this  author,  and  full  of  pieces,  in  her  well-known  stylo  of  familiar 
simplicity,  admirably  calculated  to  give  the  little  ones  additional  opportunities  to 

distinguish  1  homselves  before  an  audience.    16mo.    Paper  cover 30  ctS. 

16mo.    Board  cover ^0  Cti. 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 
Dick's  Book  of  Toasts,  Speeches  and  Responses.    Containing  Toasts 

and  Sentiments  for  Public  and  Social  Occasions,  and  specimen  Speeches  with  appro- 
priate replies  suitable  for  the  following  occasions  : 


Public  Dinners, 
Social  Dinners, 
Convivial  Gatherings, 
Art  and  Professional  Banquets, 
Manufacturers'  Meetings, 
Agricultural  and  Commercial  Festivals, 
Special  Toasts  for  Ladies, 
Christmas,  Thanksgiving  and  other 
Festivals, 


Friendly  Meetings, 

Weddings  and  their  Anniversaries, 

Army  and  Navy  Banquets, 

Patriotic  and  Political  Occasions, 

Trades'  Unions  and  Dinners, 

Benedicts'  and  Bachelors'  Banquets, 

Masonic  Celebrations, 

Sporting  Coteries, 

All  Kinds  of  Occasions. 


This  work  includes  an  instructive  dissertation  on  the  Art  of  making  amusing  After-dinner 
Speeches,  giving  hints  and  directions  by  the  aid  of  which  persons  with  only  ordi- 
nary intelligence  can  make  an  entertaining  and  telling  speech.  Also,  Correct  Eules 
and  Advice  for  Presiding  at  Table. 

The  use  of  this  work  will  render  a  poor  and  diffident  speaker  fluent  and  witty — and 
a  good  speaker  better  and  wittier,  besides  aflfording  an  immense  fund  of  anecdotes, 
wit  and  wisdom,  and  other  serviceable  matter  to  draw  upon  at  will. 

Paper  covers.     Price 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  dloth  back 50  CtS. 

Dick's  Parlor  Exhibitions,  and  How  to  Make  them  Successftd.  Con- 
taining complete  and  detailed  directions  for  preparing  and  arranging  Parlor  Exhibi- 
tions and  Amateur  Performances.    It  includes, 


Tableaux  Vivants, 
Living  Portraits, 
Living  Statuary, 
Dame  History's  Peep  Show. 
Sfiadow  Pantomimes. 


Popular  Ballads  illustrated  by 

appropriate,  action, 
Charades  of  all  kinds. 
Parlor  Pantomimes, 
Punch  and  Judy, 


AND   FIFTT  OTHEB  DrVBRTINQ  PABLOE  PASTIMES  AND   AMUSEMENTS. 

It  contains  also  a  full  Catalogue  of  the  celebrated  "  Abt  Exhibition":  and  a  practical 
treatise  on  the  wonderful  Science  of  Second-Sight,  by  the  aid  of  which  all  the  start- 
ling effects  and  achievements  of  second-sight  may  be  performed  by  any  one  possess- 
ing a  tolerably  retentive  memory. 

This  work  is  thoroughly  practical,  and  gives  the  fullest  instructions  for  preparing  and 
lighting  the  stage,  the  construction  of  the  Fbames  fob  Living  Pobtraits,  and  shows 
how  each  performance  can  be  presented  with  complete  success.    It  is  illustrated  with 

numerous  engravings  explaining  the  text.    160  pages,  paper  cover 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  ctS. 

"Worcester's  Letter- Writer  and  Book  of  Business  Forms,  for  Ladies 

and  Gentlemen.  Containing  Accurate  Directions  for  Conducting  Epistolary  Cor- 
erspondence,  with  270  Specimen  Letters,  adapted  to  every  Age  and  Situation  in  Life, 
and  to  Business  Pursuits  in  General ;  with  an  Appendix  comprising  Forms  for  Wills. 
Petitions,  Bills,  Receipts,  Drafts,  Bills  of  Exchange,  Promissory  Notes,  Executors' 
and  Administrators'  Accounts,  etc.,  etc.  This  work  is  divided  into  two  parts,  the 
portion  applicable  to  Ladies  being  kept  distinct  from  the  rest  of  the  book,  in  order  to 
provide  better  facilities  for  ready  reference.  The  Orthography  of  the  entire  work  is 
based  on  Worcester's  method,  which  is  coming  more  and  more  into  general  use,  from 
the  fact  that  it  presents  less  ambiguity  in  spelling.  216  pages. 
Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  Cts< 

Dick's  One  Hundred  Amusements  for  Evening  Parties,  Picnics  and 

Social  Gatherings.    This  book  is  full  of  Original  Novelties.    It  contains: 


New  and  Attractive  Games,  clearly  illustra- 
t  d  by  means  of  Witty  Examples,  show- 
ing how  each  may  be  most  successfully 
played. 

Surprising  Tricks,  easy  of  performance. 

Musical  and  other  innocent  sells. 


A  variety  of  new  and  ingenious  puzzles. 

Comical  illusions,  fully  described.  These 
surprising  and  grotesque  illusions  are  very 
startling  in  their  effects,  and  present  little 
or  no  difficulty  in  their  preparation. 


ALSO   AN  ENTIBEtT  NEW  VEESION  OF  THE  CELIBBATED  "  MBS.   JABLET's   WAX  WOBKS." 

The  whole  beng  illustrated  by  sixty  fine  wood  engravings.    Paper  covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  CtS. 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 

How  to  Conduct  a  Debate.  A  Series  of  Complete  Debates.  Outlines 
of  Debates  and  Questions  for  Discussion.  In  the  complete  debates,  the  cfuestious  for 
discussion  are  defined,  the  debate  formally  opened,  an  array  of  brilliant  arguments 
adduced  on  either  side,  and  the  debate  closed  according  to  parliamentary  usages.  The 
second  part  consists  of  questions  for  debate,  with  heads  of  arguments,  for  and  against, 
given  in  a  condensed  form,  for  the  speakers  to  enlarge  upon  to  suit  their  own  fancy. 
In  addition  to  these  are  a  large  collection  of  debatable  questions.  The  authorities  to 
be  referred  to  for  information  being  given  at  the  close  of  every  debate  throughout  the 

work.    By  F.  Rowton.    232  pages.    Paper  covers 50  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 75  Cts. 

Day's  Book-Keeping  Withont  a  Master.  Containing  the  Kudiments 
of  Book-keeping  in  Single  and  Double  Entry,  together  with  the  proper  Forms  and 
Rules  for  opening  and  keeping  condensed  and  general  Book  Accounts.  This  work  is 
printed  in  a  beautiful  script  type,  and  hence  combines  the  advantages  of  a  handsome 
style  of  writing  with  its  very  simple  and  easily  understood  lessons  in  Book-keeping. 
The  several  pages  have  explanations  at  the  bottom  to  assist  the  learner,  in  small  type. 
As  a  pattern  for  opening  book  accounts  it  is  especially  valuable — particularly  for  those 
who  are  not  well  posted  in  the  art.  Day's  Book-Keepino  is  the  size  of  a  regular  quarto 
Account  Book,  and  is  made  to  lie  flat  open  for  convenience  in  use 60  CtS. 

The  Young  Reporter;  or,  How  to  Write  Shorthand.    A  complete 

Phonographic  Teacher,  intended  as  a  School-book,  to  afford  thorough  instructions  to 
those  who  have  not  the  assistance  of  an  Oral  Teacher.  By  the  aid  of  this  work,  and 
the  explanatory  examples  which  are  given  as  practical  exercises,  any  person  of  the 
most  ordinary  intelligence  may  learn  to  write  Shorthand,  and  report  Speeches  and  Ser- 
mons in  a  shoi  fc  time.    Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

Howard's  Book  of  Conundrums  and  Riddles.    Containing  over  1,200 

of  the  best  Conundrums,  Riddles,  Enigmas,  Ingenious  Catches  and  Amusing  Sells  ever 
invented.  This  splendid  collection  of  curious  paradoxes  will  afford  the  material  for  a 
never-ending  feast  of  fun  and  amusement.  Any  person,  with  the  assistance  of  this 
book,  may  take  the  lead  in  entertaining  a  company,  and  keep  them  in  roars  of  laughter 

for  hours  together.    Paper  covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

The  Parlor  Magician;  or,  One  Hundred  Tricks  for  the  Drawing- 

Koom.  Containing  an  extensive  and  miscellaneous  collection  of  Conjurinti  and  Leger- 
demain, embracing :  Tricks  with  Dice,  Dominoes  and  Cards;  Tricks  with  Ribbons, 
Rings  and  Fruit ;  Tricks  with  (^oin,  Handkerchiefs  and  Balls,  etc.  The  whole  illustrated 

and  clearly  explained  with  121  engravings.     Paper  covers 30  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

Book  of  Riddles  and  500  Home  Amusements.    Containing  a  curious 

collection  of  Riddles,  Charades  and  Enigmas  ;  Rebuses,  Anagrams  and  Transpositions  ; 
Conundrums  and  Amusing  Puzzles ;  Recreations  in  Arithmetic,  and  Queer  Sleights, 
and  other  Entertaining  Amusements.  Illustrated  with  60  engravings.  Paper..  30  CtS. 
Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 60  CtS. 

The  Book  of  Fireside  Games.  Containing  an  explanation  of  a  variety 
of  Witty,  Rollicking,  Entertaining  and  Innocent  Games  and  Amusing  Forfeits,  suited 
to  the  Family  Circle  as  a  Recreation.    This  book  Is  just  the  thing  for  social  gatherings, 

parties  and  picnics.    Paper  covers 30  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

The  Book  of  500  Curious  Puzzles.  Containing  a  large  collection  of 
Curious  Puzzles,  Entertaining  Paradoxes,  Perplexing  Deceptions  in  Numbers,  Amus- 
ing Tricks  in  Geometry,  illustrated  with  a  great  variety  of  Engravings.  Paper,  30  cts. 
Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

Parlor  Tricks  with  Cards.  Containing  explanations  of  all  the  Tricks 
and  Deceptions  with  Playing  Cards  ever  Invented.     The  ■whole  illustrated  and  made 

plain  and  easy  with  70  engravings.    Paper  covers 30  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 60  CtS. 

The  Language  of  Flowers.     A  complete  dictionary  of  the  Language  of 
Flowers,  and  the  sentiments  which  they  express.    Well  arranged  and  comprehensive 
in  every  detail.    All  unnecessary  matter  has  been  omitted.    This  little  volume  Is  des- 
tined to  fill  a  want  long  felt  for  a  reliable  book  at  a  price  within  the  reach  of  all. 
Paper 15  CtS. 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 


Rarey  &  Knowlson's  Complete  Horse  Tamer  and  Farrier.    A  New 

and  Improved  Edition,  containing  :  Mr.  Rarey's  Whole  Secret  of  subduing  and  Break- 
ing Vicious  Horses  ;  His  Improved  Plan  of  Managing  Young  Colts,  and  Breaking 
them  to  the  Saddle,  to  Harness  and  the  Sulky.  Rules  for  Selecting  a  Good  Horse,  and 
for  Feeding  Horses.  Also  the  Complete  Farrier  or  Horse  Doctor,  being  the  result  of 
fifty  years'  extensive  practice  of  the  author,  John  C.  Knowlson,  during  his  life  an 
English  Farrier  of  high  popularity;  containing  the  latest  discoveries  in  the  cure  of 
Spavin.    Hlustrated  with  descriptive  engravings.      Bound  in  boards 60  CtS. 

How  to  Amuse  an  Evening  Party-    A.  complete  collection  of  Home 

Recreations.  Profusely  Illustrated  with  over  Two  Hundred  fine  wood-cuts,  contain- 
ing Round  Games  and  Forfeit  Games,  Parlor  Magic  and  Curious  Puzzles,  Comio 
Diversions  and  Parlor  Tricks,  Scientific  Recreations  and  Evening  Amusements.  A 
young  man  with  this  volume  may  render  himself  the  beau  ideal  of  a  delightful  com- 
panion at  every  party,  and  win  the  hearts  of  all  the  ladies,  by  his  powers  of  enter- 
tainment.   Bound  in  ornamental  paper  covers 30ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

Frost's  Laws  and  By-Laws  of  American  Society.  A  Complete  Trea- 
tise on  Etiquette.  Containing  Plain  and  Reliable  Directions  for  Deportment  in  every 
Situation  in  Life,  by  S.  A.  Frost,  author  of  "Frost's  Letter-Writer,"  etc.  This  is  & 
book  of  ready  reference  on  the  usages  of  Society  at  all  times  and  on  all  occasions,  and 
also  a  reliable  guide  in  the  details  of  deportment  and  polite  behavior. 

Paper  covers 30  cts. 

Bound  in  Boards,  with  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

Frost's  Original  Letter-Writer,  A  complete  collection  of  Original 
Letters  and  Notes,  upon  every  imaginable  subject  of  Every- Day  Life,  with  plain  direc- 
tions about  everything  connected  with  writing  a  letter.  By  S.  A.  Frost.  To  which  is 
added  a  comprehensive  Table  of  Synonyms,  alone  worth  double  the  price  asked  for 
the  book.  We  assure  our  readers  that  it  is  the  best  collection  of  letters  ever  published 
in  this  country;  they  are  written  in  plain  and  natural  language,  and  elegant  in  style 
without  being  high-flown.    Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back, ....  50  CtS» 

The  Amateur  Trapper  and  Trap-Maker's  Guide.     A  complete  and 

carefully  prepared  treatise  on  the  art  of  Trapping,  Snaring  and  Netting. 
This  comprehensive  work  is  embellished  with  fifty  engraved  illustrations ;  and 
these,  together  with  the  clear  explanations  which  accompany  them,  will  enable  any- 
body of  moderate  comprehension  to  make  and  set  any  of  the  traps  described.  It 
also  gives  the  baits  usually  employed  by  the  most  successful  Hunters  and  Trappers, 
and  exposes  their  secret  methods  of  attracting  and  catching  animals,  birds,  etc.,  with 

scarcely  a  possibility  of  failure.     Large  16mo,  paper  covers 50  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 75  CtS. 

How  to  Write  a  Composition.  The  use  of  this  excellent  hand-book 
will  save  the  student  the  many  hours  of  labor  too  often  wasted  in  trying  to 
write  a  plain  composition.  It  aff'ords  a  perfect  skeleton  of  one  hundred  and  seven- 
teen different  subjects,  with  their  headings  or  divisions  clearly  defined,  and  each 
heading  filled  in  with  the  ideas  which  the  subject  suggests ;  so  that  all  the  writer 
has  to  do,  in  order  to  produce  a  good  composition,  is  to  enlarge  on  them  to  suit  his 

taste  and  inclination.      178  pages,  paper  covers 30  Cts. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  cts. 

Lander's  Revised  Work  of  Odd-Fellowship.  Containing  all  the  Lec- 
tures, complete,  with  Regulations  for  Opening,  Conducting  and  Closing  a  Lodge  ; 
together  with  Forms  of  Initiation,  Charges  of  the  Various  Officers,  etc.,  with  the 
Complete  work  in  the  following  Degrees  :  Initiation  ;  First,  or  Pink  Degree  ;  Second, 
or  Royal  Blue  Degree ;  Third,  or  Scarlet  Degree.  By  Edwin  F.  Landek.  This  hand- 
book of  the  Revised  Work  of  the  Independent  Order  of  Odd- Fellowship  has  been  pre- 
pared in  conformity  with  the  amendments  and  alterations  adopted  by  the  Sovereign 
Grand  Lodge  of  Canada  in  September,  1880,  16mo,  paper  cover 25  CtS. 

Live  and  Learn.     A  guide  for  all  those  who  wish  to  speak  and  write 
correctly;  particularly  intended  as  a  Book  of  Reference  for  the  solution  of  difficulties 
connected  with  Grammar,  Composition,  Punctuation,   &c.,  containing  examples  of 
1.000  mistakes  of  daily  occurrence  in  Bi)ea*ing,  writing  and  pronunciation. 
Cloth,  16  mo.,  216  pages SOcti. 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 

DIALOGUE  BOOKS. 

Steele's  Exhibition  Dialogues.  A  collection  of  Dramatic  Dialogues 
and  Easy  Plays,  excellently  adapted  for  Amateurs  in  Parlor  and  Exhibition  Perform- 
ances. By  Silas  S.  Steelk.  These  dialogues  and  plays  are  written  expressly  for 
Amateurs,  and  combine  simplicity  of  construction  with  telling  "stage  situations"  ; 
they  arc,   therefore,  easy  of  performance,    and    at   the  same   time  very   effective. 

150  pages.     Illustrated,  i^aper  covers 30  Ct;. 

Bound  in  boards 50  CtS- 

McBride's  New  Dialogues.  Especially  designed  for  School  and  Literary- 
Amateur  Entertainments;  containing  entirely  New  and  Original  Dialogues,  introduc- 
ing Irish,  Yankee,  and  other  eccentric  characters.    By  H.  Elliott  McBridb. 

The  marked  favor  with  which  his  four  previous  volumes  have  been  received  sug- 
gested the  necessity  for  an  increased  variety  of  new  eccentric  and  characteristic 
pieces.  They  are  all  written  with  a  view  to  develop  dramatic  talent,  and  abound  in 
quaint  humor,  Dialect  Drolleries,  and  telling  stage  "situations."  178  pages,  illumi- 
nated paper  cover 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards 50  CtS. 

HcBride's  Temperance  Dialogues.    Designed  for  the  use  of  Schools, 

Temperance  Societies,  Bands  of  Hope,  Divisions,  Lodges  and  Literary  Circles.  Intro- 
ducing Yankee,  Dutch,  Irish,  Negro  and  other  dialect  characters.     By  H.  Elliott 

MoBride.    183  pages,  paper  cover SOctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

DicBride's  Humorous  Dialogues.    A  collection  of  New  Dialogues,  full 

of  humor  and  witty  repartee;  some  of  them  introducing  Irish,  Dutch,  Yankee  and 

other  dialect  characters.    192  pages,  paper  cover 30  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50ct8. 

McBride's   Comic   Dialogues.     A  collection  of  twenty-three   Original 

Humoroua  Dialogues,  especially  designed  for  the  display  of  Amateur  dramatic  talent, 
and  introducing  a  variety  of  sentimental,  sprightly,  comic  and  genuine  Yankee  char- 
acters, and  other  ingeniously  developed  eccentricities.  180  pages,  paper  covers. 30  ctS. 
Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50ctS. 

HcBride's  All  Kinds  of  Dialogues.  A  collection  of  twenty-five  Origi- 
nal, Humorous  and  Domestic  Dialogues,  introducing  Yankee,  Irish,  Dutch  and  other 
characters.    Excellently  adapted  for  Amateur  Performances.    180  pages,  illuminated 

paper  covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

Graham's  School  Dialogues  for  Young  People.  Being  a  new  and  orig- 
inal collection  of  Dialogues  intended  for  Anniversaries  and  Exhibitions,  carefuUy 
prepared  and  well  calculated  to  develop  dramatic  talent.    176  pages,  illuminated 

paper  c^ver 30  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

Holmes'  Very  Little  Dialosrues  for  Very  Little  Folks.     Containing 

forty-seven  New  and  Original  Dialogues,  with  short  and  easy  parts,  almost  entirely 
in  words  of  one  syllable,  suited  to  the  capacity  and  comprehension  of  very  young 

children.     Paper  covers 30  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  ctS. 

Prost's  Dialogues  for  Young  Folks.  A  collection  of  thirty-six  Original, 
Moral  and  Humorous  Dialogues.    Adapted  for  boys  and  girls  between  the    ges  ">£  ten 

and  fourteen  years.    Paper  covers 30  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

Frost's  New  Book  of  Dialogues.  Containing  twenty  nine  entirely  New 
and  Original  Humorous  Dialogues  for  boys  and  girls  between  the  ages  of  twelve  and 

fifteen  years.    180  pages,  paper  covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  ctS- 

Frost's  Humorous  and  Exhibition  Dialogues.    This  is  a  collection  of 

twenty -five  Sprightly  Original  Dialogues  in  Prose  and  Verse,  intended  to  be  spoken  at 

School  Exhibitions.    178  pages,  paper  covers 30  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards fiO  CtS. 

TTE  WILL  SE.VD  A  CATALOGUE  freo.  to  any  addresx,  rorttmning  a  list  of  all  the  Dia^ 
loguain  each  of  the  above  bookt,  together  vnth  the  number  of  boys  and  girls  required  tt 
perform  them. 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 

AMATEUR  THEATRICALS. 

All  the  plays  in  the  following  excellent  hooks  are  especially  designed  for  Amateur 
performance.  The  majority  of  them  are  in  one  act  and  one  scene,  and  may 
he  represented  in  any  moderate-sized  parlor,  without  much  preparation  of 
costume  or  scenery.  Catalogue,  with  number  and  sex  of  performer's  in  each, 
furnished  on  application. 

Kavanaugh's  Humorous  Dramas  for  School  Exhibitions  and  Private 

Theatrical.    These  excellent   Dramas  are  all  original,  and  were  written  expressly 

for  School  and  Parlor  Performance.    Paper  covers 30  cts. 

Bound  in  boards 60  CtS. 

Alice  in  Wonderland,  and  other  Fairy  Piays  for  Children.  Consist- 
ing of  Four  Juvenile  Dramas,  the  first  of  which  is  a  faithful  Dramatic  Version  of  Mr. 
Lewis  Carroll's  well-known  "Alice  in  Wonderland";  and  all  combining,  in  the  hap- 
piest manner,  light  comedy,  burlesque  and  extravaganza.  By  Kate  Freiligrath- 
Kroeker.  These  plays  are  written  in  a  style  of  quaint  childish  simplicity,  but  embody 
a  brilliant  vein  of  wit  and  humor.     The  music  of  all  the  songs  introduced  is  given, 

thus  rendering  each  drama  complete  in  all  respects.    Paper  cover 30  CtS 

Bound  in  boards 50  Cts' 

Barmby's  Musical  Plays  for  Young  People.     Suitable  for  Private 

Theatricals.  These  Plays  are  in  Burlesque  style  and  entirely  in  Rhyme  ;  they  are 
irresistably  Comical  iu  expression,  and  elegant  in  construction.  Each  Play  includes 
the  Vocal  Score  and  Piano  Accompaniment  to  all  Songs,  Duets  and  Choruses  intro- 
duced, making  it  complete  in  itself,  both  in  text  and  music.     201  pages. 

Paper  covers 30  CtS 

Bound  in  boards 50  CtS* 

Parlor  Theatricals;  or  Winter  Evenings'  Entertainment.  Contain- 
ing Acting  Proverbs,  Dramatic  Charades,  Drawing-Room  Pantomimes,  a  Musical 
Burlesque  and  an  amusing  Farce,  with  instructions  for  Amateurs.     Illustrated  with 

engravings.    Paper   covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  ctS. 

Howard's  Book  of  Drawing-Room  Theatricals.     A   collection  of 

twenty  short  and  amusing  plays.    Some  of  the  plays  are  adapted  lor  performers  of 

one  sex  only.    186  pages,  paper  covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  ctS. 

Hudson's  Private  Theatricals.  A  collection  of  fourteen  humorous  plays. 
Four  of  these  plays  are  adapted  for  performance  by  males  only,  and  three  are  for 

females.    180  Pages,  paper  covers 30  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  cts! 

Nugent 's  Burlesque  aud  Musical  Acting  Charades.    Containing  ten 

Charades,  all  in  different  styles,  two  of  which  are  easy  and  effective  Comic  Parlor 
Operas,  with  Music  and  Piano-forte  Accompaniments.    176  pages. 

Paper  covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  {back 50  CtS. 

Frost's  Dramatic  Proverbs  and  Charades.  Containing  eleven  Pro- 
verbs and  fifteen  Charades,  some  of  which  are  for  Dramatic  Performance,  and  others 

arranged  for  Tableaux  Vivants.    176  pages,  paper  covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  backs 50  CtS- 

Frost's  Parlor  Acting  Charades.  These  twelve  excellent  and  original 
Charades  are  arranged  as  short  parlor  Comedies  and  Farces,  full  of  brilliant  repartee 

and  amusing  situations.    182  pages,  paper  covers 30  ctS. 

niuminated  boards 50  ctS. 

Frost's  Book  of  Tableaux  and  Shadow  Pantomimes.    A  collection  of 

Tableaux  Vivants  and  Shadow  Pantomimes,  with  stage  instructions  for  Costuming, 

Grouping,  etc.    180  pages,  paper  covers SOctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  cts. 

Frost's  Amateur  Theatricals.     A  collection  of  eight  original  plays  ;  all 

short,  amusing  and  new.     180  pages,  paper  covers 30  cts* 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back » 50  ctS. 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 

READINGS  AND  RECITATIONS. 

Kavanaugh's  Exhibition  Reciter.  For  very  Little  Children.  A  collection 

of  entirely  Original  Recitations,  Dialogues  and  short  Speeches,  adapted  for  very  little 
boys  and  girls,  including  also  a  variety  of  pieces,  humorous,  serious  and  dramatic, 
suitable  for  children  from  Three  to  Ten  years  old,  for  public  and  private  School  Exhi- 
bitions and  other  Juvenile  Entertainments. 

It  also  includes  a  May-Day  Festival  lor  very  little  children,  and  a  number  of  beauti- 
ful Speaking  Tableaux.    By  the  author  of  "  Kavanaugh's  Juvenile  Speaker."    Bound 

in  illuminated  paper  covers -30  CtS. 

Bound  in  illuminated  board  covers 60  CtS. 

Xavanau^h's  Juvenile  Speaker.  For  very  Little  Boys  and  Girls.  Con- 
taining short  and  easily-learned  Speeches  and  Dialogues,  expressly  adapted  for  School 
Celebrations,  May-Day  Festivals  and  other  Children's  Entertainments,  embracing  one 
kundred  and  twenty -three  effective  pieces.    By  Mrs.  Bussell  Kavanaugh,  Illuminated 

paper  cover 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  ctS. 

Dick's  Series  of  Recitations  and  Reading^s,  Nos.  1  to  15.     Comprising 

a  carefully  compiled  selection  of  Humorous,  Pathetic,  Eloquent,  Patriotic  and  Senti- 
mental Pieces  in  Poetry  and  Prose,  exclusively  designed  for  Recitation  or  Reading. 
Edited  by  Wm.  B.  Dick.  Each  number  of  the  Series  contains  about  180  pages.  Illumi- 
nated paper  cover,  each 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  cts! 

Beecher's  Recitations  and  Readings.  Humorous,  Serious,  Dramatic, 
including  Prose  and  Poetical  Selections  in  Dutch,  Yankee,  Irish,  Negro  and  other  Dia- 
lects.    180  pages,  paper  covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  ooards,  cloth  back 50  ctS. 

Howard's  Recitations.  Comic,  Serious  and  Pathetic.  Being  a  collection 
of  fresh  Recitations  in  Prose  and  Poetry,  suitable  for  Exhibitions  and  Evening  Parti6«j. 

180  pages,  paper  covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  ctS. 

Spencer's  Book  of  Comic  Speeches  and  Humoroos  Recitations.    A 

collection  of  Comic  Speeches,  Humorous  Prose  and  Poetical  Recitations,  Laughable 

Dramatic  Scenes  and  Eccentric  Dialect  Stories.    192  pages,  paper  covers 30  Cts- 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 60  CtS. 

Wilson's  Book  of  Recitations  and  Dialogues.    Containing  a  choice 

selection  of  Poetical  and  Prose  Recitations.    Designed  as  an  Assistant  to  Teachers  and 

Students  iu  preparing  Exhibitions.    188  pages,  paper  covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  ctS. 

Barton's  Comic  Recitations  and  Humorons  Dialogues.   A  variety  of 

Comic  Recitations,  in  Prose  and  Poetry,  Eccentric  Orations  and  Laughable  Interludes. 

180  pages,  paper  covers 30  ctS- 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  CiS. 

Brudder  Bones'  Book  of  Stump  Speeches  and  Burlesque  Orations. 

Also  containing  Humorous  Lectures,  Ethiopian  Dialogues,  Plantation  Scenes,  Negro 
Farces  and  Burlesques,  Laughable  Interludes  and  Comio  Recitations.    188  pages. 

Paper  covers 30  ct3. 

Bound  in  boards,  illuminated 50  CtS. 

Burbank's  Recitations  and  Readings.  A  collection  of  Humorous,  Dra- 
matic and  Dialect  Selections,  edited  and  arranged  for  Public  Reading  or  Recitation,  by 
Alfred  P.  Burbank;  and  containing  many  choice  selections  never  before  in  print,  as 
well  as  some  old  favorites.    16mo,  paper  cover 25  CtS. 

Mar  tine's  Droll  Dialogues  and  Laughable  Recitations.  A  collection  of 

Humorous  Dialogues,  Comic  Recitations,  Brilliant  Burlesques  and  Spirited  Stump 

Speeches.    188  pages,  paper  covers 30  Ct3. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

WE  WILL  SEND  A  CATALOGUE,  containing  a  complete  list  of  all  ihe 
pieces  in  each  qf  the  above  books,  to  any  persons  who  wUlserMustJmr  address. 


Popular  Books  sent  Free  of  Postage  at  the  Prices  annexed. 
Dick's  Ethiopian  Scenes,  Variety  Sketches  and  Stump  Speeches. 

Containing  End  Men's  Jokes, 

Negro  Interludes  and  Farces:  \  Dialogues  and  Repartee  for  Interlocutor  and 

Fresh  Dialogues  for  Interlocutor  and  Banjo  ;        bones; 

JV'^w  Stump  Speedies  ;  \  Quaint  Burlesque  Sermons; 

Humorous  Lectures  :  I  Jokes,  Quips  and  Gags. 

Dialect  Sketches  and  Eccentricities  ;  | 

It  includes  a  number  of  Amusing  Scenes  and  Negro  acts,  and  is  full  of  the  side-splitting 
vagaries  of  the  best  Minstrel  Troups-in  existence,  besides  a  number  of  Original  Kecita- 

tions  and  Sketches  in  the  Negro  Dialect,    178  pages.    Paper  covers 30  ctS. 

Bound  iu  boards,  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

Tambo's  End-Men's  Minstrel  Gags.     Containing  some  of  the  best 

jokes  and  repartees  of  the  most  celebrated  "burnt  cork "  performers  of  our  day. 
Tambo  and  Bones  iu  all  sorts  and  manner  of  scrapes.  Also  containing  a  rich  collection 
of  Ballads,  humorous  and  pathetic,  Darkey  Dialogues,  Sketches,  Plantation  Scenes,  Ec- 
centric Doings,  Humorous  Lectures,  Laughable  Interludes.  Huge  Africanisms,  Bur- 
lesque Stump  Speeches,  Mirth-Provoking  Witticisms,  Conundrums,  Yarns,  Plantation 
Songsand  Dances,  etc.,  etc.  In  short,  acomplete  Hand-Book  of  Burnt  Cork  Drollery, 
which  will  be  found  alike  useful  to  the  professional  and  amateur.    Everything  new 

and  rich.    Paper  covers 30  CtB. 

Bound  in  boards,  with  cloth  back 50  CtS. 

Dick's  Dutch,  French  and  Yankee  Dialect  Recitations.  An  unsur- 
passed Collection  of  Droll  Dutch  Blunders,  Frenchmen's  Funny  Mistakes,  and  Ludi- 
crous and  Extravagant  Yankee  Yams,  each  Eecitation  beiug  in  its  own  peculiar  dialect. 
To  those  who  make  Dialect  Ilecitations  a  speciality,  this  Collection  will  be  of  particu- 
lar service,  as  it  contains  all  the  best  pieces  that  are  incidentally  scattered  through  » 
large  number  of  volumes  of  "Recitations  and  Readings,"  besides  several  new  and 

excellent  sketches  never  before  published.    170  pages,  paper  cover 30  CtS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  CtB» 

Dick's  Irish  Dialect  Recitations.  A  carefully  compiled  Collection  of 
Bare  Irish  Stories,  Comic  Poetical  and  Prose  Recitations,  Humorous  Letters  and 
Funny  Recitals,  all  told  with  the  irresistible  Humor  of  the  Irish  Dialect.  This  Collec- 
tion contains,  in  addition  to  new  and  original  pieces,  all  the  very  best  Recitations  in 
the  Irish  Dialect  that  can  be  gathered  from  a  whole  library  of  "  Recitation"  books. 
It  is  full  of  the  sparkling  witticisms  and  queer  conceits  of  the  wittiest  nation  on 
earth;  and  apart  from  its  special  object,  it  furnishes  a  fund  of  the  most  entertaining 

matter  for  perusal  in  leisure  moments.    170  pages.    Paper  cover 30  ctS. 

Bound  in  boards,  cloth  back 50  ctS. 

Frank  Converse's  Complete  Banjo  Instructor  Without  a  Master.  Con- 
taining a  choice  collection  of  Banjo  Solos  and  Hornpipes,  WalkArounds,  Reels  and 
Jigs.  Songs  and  Banjo  Stories,  progressively  arranged  and  plainly  explained,  enabling 
the  learner  to  become  a  proficient  banjoist  without  the  aid  of  a  teacher.  The  neces- 
sary explanations  accompany  each  tune,  and  are  placed  under  the  notes  on  each  page, 
plainly  showing  the  string  required,  the  finger  to  be  used  for  stopping  it,  the  manner 
of  striking  and  the  number  of  times  it  must  be  sounded.  The  Instructor  is  illustrated 
with  diagrams  and  explanatory  symbols.    100  pages    Bound  in  boards 50  CtS. 

Tony  Denier's  Parlor  Tableaux  or  Living  Pictures.  Containing  about 

eighty  popular  subjects,  with  plain  and  explicit  directions  for  arranging  the  stage, 
dressing-rooms,  lights,  full  description  of  costumes,  duties  of  stage  manager,  proper- 
ties and  scenery  required,  and  all  the  necessary  directions  for  getting  them  up.  Among 
the  contents  there  are  nine  tableaux  for  male  and  an  equal  number  for /cnia/c  characters 
only.  A  great  number  of  them  introduce  groups  of  boys,  and  many  more  groups  of 
girls  only  ;  others  again  introducing  both,  and  still  more  in  which  entire  classes  can 
take  part.  For  public  or  private  entertainment,  there  is  nothing  which  is  so  interest- 
ing and  instructive  as  Tableaux 30  ctS. 

North's  Book  of  Love-Letters.  "With  directions  how  to  write  and  when 
to  use  them,  and  120  Specimen  Letters,  suitable  for  Lovers  of  any  age  and  condition, 
and  under  all  circumstances.  Interspersed  with  the  author's  comments  thereon.  The 
whole  forming  a  convenient  Hand-book  of  valuable  inforn-ation  and  counsel  for  the 
use  of  those  who  need  friendly  guidance  and  advice  in  matters  of  Love, 
Courtship  and  Marriage.    By  Ingoldsby  North .    Bound  in  boards 50  CtS, 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 

Renewed  books  ^re  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


94Mar^4WF 


KH 


REC'D  L& 


MARlOW-ioPM 


Q£C  .s  0  1867 


REC'OLO    JULjJ  iVz-J^AM3  4 


MfiP  9  i  197T 


B£C  Cliy — tiM 


im 


A7r 


LD  21A-40m-4.'63 
(D647l8l0)476B 


General  Library- 
University  of  California 
Berkeley 


YC  27430 


